Prove2Me
Navigate
DiscoverCollectionsFormalpediaBlogsUsersMomentumMy Missions+
Prove2Me
⌕
Log in

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

Operations Research

2,721 missions · 1,458 completed

The discipline of applying mathematical analysis to complex decision problems in operations: allocating scarce resources, scheduling, routing, inventory, and the design of service and production systems. Drawing on mathematical programming, stochastic modeling, queueing, simulation, and game-theoretic reasoning, it seeks policies that perform provably well in systems shaped by constraints, congestion, and uncertainty.

Missions

Open1263Completed1458All2721
Convex OptimizationOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Scenarios and Policy Aggregation in Optimization Under Uncertainty 1: In the Convex Case Progressive Hedging Converges to Optimal Solutions of (P) and (D) Exactly When They ExistResearch Paper

Motivation

Decisions under uncertainty are often modelled by a finite set of scenarios: possible futures s∈Ss\in Ss∈S with weights psp_sps​, each with its own optimization problem. Solving every scenario separately is easy but useless in practice, because the decision taken today cannot depend on which scenario will be revealed tomorrow. Progressive hedging, introduced by Rockafellar and Wets in Scenarios and policy aggregation in optimization under uncertainty (IIASA Working Paper WP-87-119, 1987; Mathematics of Operations Research 16(1), 1991), restores this nonanticipativity by iterating between scenario-wise solves and an averaging step, guided by price systems that act as multipliers. It is the standard decomposition method for multistage stochastic programs and is implemented in widely used software such as PySP/mpi-sppy. This mission formalizes the paper's convergence theorem in the convex case, Theorem 5.1, together with the duality theory of §4 and the proof steps of §5 it rests on.

Setting

Let SSS be a finite set of scenarios with weights ps>0p_s>0ps​>0, ∑sps=1\sum_s p_s=1∑s​ps​=1. For each sss the scenario subproblem (Ps)(P_s)(Ps​) is to minimize fs(x)f_s(x)fs​(x) over x∈Cs⊂Rnx\in C_s\subset\mathbb R^nx∈Cs​⊂Rn, where CsC_sCs​ is nonempty and closed and fsf_sfs​ is locally Lipschitz with bounded level sets {x∈Cs∣fs(x)≤α}\{x\in C_s\mid f_s(x)\le\alpha\}{x∈Cs​∣fs​(x)≤α}. The convex case is when every fsf_sfs​ and CsC_sCs​ is convex.

A decision vector is split by time, x=(x1,…,xT)x=(x_1,\dots,x_T)x=(x1​,…,xT​). A policy is a map X:S→RnX:S\to\mathbb R^nX:S→Rn; the policy space E\mathcal EE carries the inner product ⟨X,Y⟩=∑spsX(s)⋅Y(s)\langle X,Y\rangle=\sum_s p_s X(s)\cdot Y(s)⟨X,Y⟩=∑s​ps​X(s)⋅Y(s) and norm ∥X∥=⟨X,X⟩1/2\|X\|=\langle X,X\rangle^{1/2}∥X∥=⟨X,X⟩1/2. At each time ttt the scenarios are partitioned into bundles A∈AtA\in\mathcal A_tA∈At​ of scenarios that cannot yet be told apart. The aggregation X^=JX\hat X=JXX^=JX replaces Xt(s)X_t(s)Xt​(s) by its ppp-weighted average over the bundle of sss at time ttt, and K=I−JK=I-JK=I−J. The implementable policies are N={X∣Xt\mathcal N=\{X\mid X_tN={X∣Xt​ constant on each A∈At}A\in\mathcal A_t\}A∈At​}, the price systems are M={W∣JW=0}=N⊥\mathcal M=\{W\mid JW=0\}=\mathcal N^\perpM={W∣JW=0}=N⊥, and the admissible policies are C={X∣X(s)∈Cs ∀s}\mathcal C=\{X\mid X(s)\in C_s\ \forall s\}C={X∣X(s)∈Cs​ ∀s}. With F(X)=∑spsfs(X(s))F(X)=\sum_s p_s f_s(X(s))F(X)=∑s​ps​fs​(X(s)) the problem is

(P)minimize F(X) subject to X∈C∩N.(P)\qquad \text{minimize } F(X) \text{ subject to } X\in\mathcal C\cap\mathcal N .(P)minimize F(X) subject to X∈C∩N.

Its Lagrangian is L(X,W)=F(X)+⟨X,W⟩L(X,W)=F(X)+\langle X,W\rangleL(X,W)=F(X)+⟨X,W⟩ on C×M\mathcal C\times\mathcal MC×M, the dual is (D)(D)(D): maximize G(W)=inf⁡X∈CL(X,W)G(W)=\inf_{X\in\mathcal C}L(X,W)G(W)=infX∈C​L(X,W) over W∈MW\in\mathcal MW∈M with G(W)>−∞G(W)>-\inftyG(W)>−∞.

The progressive hedging algorithm fixes r>0r>0r>0, starts from any X0X^0X0 and any W0∈MW^0\in\mathcal MW0∈M, and in iteration ν\nuν sets X^ν=JXν\hat X^\nu=JX^\nuX^ν=JXν, lets Xν+1(s)X^{\nu+1}(s)Xν+1(s) minimize

fs(x)+x⋅Wν(s)+12r ∣x−X^ν(s)∣2over x∈Csf_s(x)+x\cdot W^\nu(s)+\tfrac12 r\,|x-\hat X^\nu(s)|^2\quad\text{over } x\in C_sfs​(x)+x⋅Wν(s)+21​r∣x−X^ν(s)∣2over x∈Cs​

for every scenario, and updates Wν+1=Wν+rKXν+1W^{\nu+1}=W^\nu+rKX^{\nu+1}Wν+1=Wν+rKXν+1.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 5.1

In the convex case with exact minimization, the sequences {X^ν}\{\hat X^\nu\}{X^ν} and {Wν}\{W^\nu\}{Wν} are bounded if and only if (P) and (D) have optimal solutions. In that case there are optimal X∗X^*X∗ for (P) and W∗W^*W∗ for (D) with

X^ν→X∗,Wν→W∗,\hat X^\nu\to X^*,\qquad W^\nu\to W^*,X^ν→X∗,Wν→W∗,

and, with ∥(X,W)∥r=(∥X∥2+r−2∥W∥2)1/2\|(X,W)\|_r=(\|X\|^2+r^{-2}\|W\|^2)^{1/2}∥(X,W)∥r​=(∥X∥2+r−2∥W∥2)1/2,

∥(X^ν+1,Wν+1)−(X∗,W∗)∥r≤∥(X^ν,Wν)−(X∗,W∗)∥r\|(\hat X^{\nu+1},W^{\nu+1})-(X^*,W^*)\|_r\le\|(\hat X^{\nu},W^{\nu})-(X^*,W^*)\|_r∥(X^ν+1,Wν+1)−(X∗,W∗)∥r​≤∥(X^ν,Wν)−(X∗,W∗)∥r​

for all ν≥0\nu\ge0ν≥0, strictly unless (X^ν,Wν)=(X∗,W∗)(\hat X^\nu,W^\nu)=(X^*,W^*)(X^ν,Wν)=(X∗,W∗), and the step lengths ∥(X^ν+1,Wν+1)−(X^ν,Wν)∥r\|(\hat X^{\nu+1},W^{\nu+1})-(\hat X^\nu,W^\nu)\|_r∥(X^ν+1,Wν+1)−(X^ν,Wν)∥r​ are nonincreasing from ν=1\nu=1ν=1 on.

Milestones

  1. Propositions 3.1–3.3: existence for the scenario subproblems, the lower bound α^=min⁡CF=E{min⁡(Ps)}≤min⁡(P)\hat\alpha=\min_{\mathcal C}F=E\{\min(P_s)\}\le\min(P)α^=minC​F=E{min(Ps​)}≤min(P), well-posedness of every modified subproblem (unique solution in the convex case), and compact level sets of FFF on C\mathcal CC.
  2. Theorem 4.2 and Proposition 4.4 (in the convex case): the scenario-wise subgradient conditions −W∗(s)∈∂fs(X∗(s))+NCs(X∗(s))-W^*(s)\in\partial f_s(X^*(s))+N_{C_s}(X^*(s))−W∗(s)∈∂fs​(X∗(s))+NCs​​(X∗(s)) are equivalent to a saddle point of LLL, and the analogous conditions are necessary and sufficient for the iterates.
  3. Proposition 4.5 and Theorem 4.6: the perturbation function Φ(U)=min⁡{F(X)∣X∈C, KX=U}\Phi(U)=\min\{F(X)\mid X\in\mathcal C,\ KX=U\}Φ(U)=min{F(X)∣X∈C, KX=U} and the duality −∞<min⁡(P)=sup⁡(D)-\infty<\min(P)=\sup(D)−∞<min(P)=sup(D), argmax⁡(D)=−∂Φ(0)\operatorname{argmax}(D)=-\partial\Phi(0)argmax(D)=−∂Φ(0).
  4. Proposition 5.3: each iteration is the unique saddle point of a proximal saddle function.
  5. From the proof of Theorem 5.1: firm nonexpansiveness (5.26) of the iteration map in ∥⋅∥r\|\cdot\|_r∥⋅∥r​, and the identification of its fixed points with primal–dual optimal pairs.

Significance

Theorem 5.1 is the guarantee behind progressive hedging in the convex case: solving only small scenario problems and averaging, the method finds a nonanticipative optimal policy and an optimal price system whenever these exist, with a distance to the solution that never increases. The dual sequence WνW^\nuWν converges to a solution of (D), which gives the prices of information that the paper interprets economically. Boundedness of the iterates is an exact test for solvability.

The result is classical and fully proved on paper; its proof reduces the algorithm to Rockafellar's proximal point algorithm for a maximal monotone operator. No machine-checked version is known to exist. The mission produces a formal statement and, eventually, a proof of the full chain from scenario data to convergence, including the duality theorem of §4, which is of independent use for scenario-based stochastic programming. A related platform mission in this series treats the nonconvex case (limits of the algorithm satisfy first-order conditions).

Difficulty

The algorithm is not a proximal point method in the variable XXX: it acts on the pair (X^,W)(\hat X,W)(X^,W), and the averaged policy X^ν\hat X^\nuX^ν is in general not admissible while XνX^\nuXν is in general not implementable. The step that fails in a direct attempt is showing that the map (X^ν,Wν)↦(X^ν+1,Wν+1)(\hat X^\nu,W^\nu)\mapsto(\hat X^{\nu+1},W^{\nu+1})(X^ν,Wν)↦(X^ν+1,Wν+1) is firmly nonexpansive, which requires recognizing it as the resolvent of the monotone operator of a saddle function restricted to N×M\mathcal N\times\mathcal MN×M, in the rescaled norm ∥⋅∥r\|\cdot\|_r∥⋅∥r​ rather than in the original product norm. A second difficulty is duality: identifying the fixed points of the iteration with optimal pairs of (P) and (D) needs the convex duality theory of §4 for an extended-real-valued perturbation function without any constraint qualification.

Formalization scope

Rn\mathbb R^nRn is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n); policies are functions S → EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n) with S a Fintype. Time periods are a monotone map assigning each coordinate to its period, and each At\mathcal A_tAt​ is a Setoid S; no refinement between periods is assumed. The standing assumptions of §3 are fields of the model structure, and the convex case is a separate hypothesis.

The inner product (2.2), norm (2.3) and ∥⋅∥r\|\cdot\|_r∥⋅∥r​ (5.2) are explicit weighted sums. Mathlib's norm on a function type is the sup norm; it is used only for topology (boundedness, convergence, local Lipschitz continuity, compactness), which coincides with that of (2.3) in finite dimension. Stating (5.3) or (5.26) with Mathlib's sup norm would change the inequalities and is ruled out. Optimal values min⁡(P)\min(P)min(P), sup⁡(D)\sup(D)sup(D), GGG, Φ\PhiΦ, α^\hat\alphaα^ and ℓ\ellℓ are EReal infima and suprema, so that infeasibility gives +∞+\infty+∞ and an unbounded dual objective gives −∞-\infty−∞; real-valued sInf would silently return 000 there. A solution of (D) must have G(W∗)>−∞G(W^*)>-\inftyG(W∗)>−∞. The algorithm is a predicate on sequences, with X0X^0X0 arbitrary and W0∈MW^0\in\mathcal MW0∈M; Proposition 3.2 shows the predicate is satisfiable.

Subgradients and normal cones are those of convex analysis; the normal cone is the published definition FirstOrderOpt.ConvexTheory.normalCone. Not formalized: the nonconvex (Clarke) parts of §4, the linear-quadratic case and its rate result, and inexact minimization.

A complete development needs: separable minimization over product sets, finite-dimensional compactness arguments, convex duality for a perturbation function on a subspace, and the convergence of the proximal point algorithm for maximal monotone operators (Rockafellar 1976, Theorem 1 and Proposition 1). The last two are reusable well beyond this mission; contributions of either as standalone results are welcome.

Selected references

  • R. T. Rockafellar and R. J.-B. Wets, Scenarios and policy aggregation in optimization under uncertainty, IIASA Working Paper WP-87-119, 1987; Mathematics of Operations Research 16(1):119–147, 1991. https://pure.iiasa.ac.at/id/eprint/2933/ — https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.16.1.119
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Monotone operators and the proximal point algorithm, SIAM Journal on Control and Optimization 14(5):877–898, 1976. https://doi.org/10.1137/0314056
  • G. J. Minty, Monotone (nonlinear) operators in Hilbert space, Duke Mathematical Journal 29(3):341–346, 1962. https://doi.org/10.1215/S0012-7094-62-02933-2
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Convex Analysis, Princeton University Press, 1970. https://doi.org/10.1515/9781400873173
15 thms1 active userReviewed
Convex OptimizationFunctional Analysis·Captain: mikedeng1

Stochastic Convex Programming: Basic Duality 1: With Bounded Constraint Sets the Two-Stage Stochastic Convex Program Satisfies min P = sup DResearch Paper

Motivation

A two-stage stochastic program with recourse models a decision taken in two steps: a first-stage decision is fixed before a random outcome is observed, and a second-stage (recourse) decision is chosen after the outcome is known, both subject to constraints and both incurring costs. The model is the standard framework for planning under uncertainty in operations research: capacity planning, production and inventory, energy dispatch, finance.

For linear recourse problems, duality was developed in the 1960s and early 1970s by Wets and others, partly under integrability restrictions on the random data. R. T. Rockafellar and R. J.-B. Wets, Stochastic convex programming: basic duality (Pacific J. Math. 62 (1976), doi:10.2140/pjm.1976.62.173), treat the convex case, where every cost and constraint function is convex, by embedding the problem in a family of perturbed problems and applying the perturbational theory of convex duality (Rockafellar, Conjugate Duality and Optimization, SIAM 1974) together with the theory of convex integral functionals. The paper's dual variables are integrable price systems, interpreted as equilibrium prices for perturbations of the constraints; it is the starting point of a series of papers by the same authors on stochastic convex programming (relatively complete recourse, Kuhn–Tucker conditions, singular multipliers).

Setting

Let (S,Σ,σ)(S,\Sigma,\sigma)(S,Σ,σ) be a probability space. A vector x1∈Rn1x_1\in\mathbb R^{n_1}x1​∈Rn1​ is chosen subject to x1∈C1x_1\in C_1x1​∈C1​ and f1i(x1)≤0f_{1i}(x_1)\le 0f1i​(x1​)≤0 (i=1,…,m1i=1,\dots,m_1i=1,…,m1​), at cost f10(x1)f_{10}(x_1)f10​(x1​). Then s∈Ss\in Ss∈S is observed and x2(s)∈Rn2x_2(s)\in\mathbb R^{n_2}x2​(s)∈Rn2​ is chosen subject to x2(s)∈C2x_2(s)\in C_2x2​(s)∈C2​ and f2i(s,x1,x2(s))≤0f_{2i}(s,x_1,x_2(s))\le 0f2i​(s,x1​,x2​(s))≤0 (i=1,…,m2i=1,\dots,m_2i=1,…,m2​), at cost f20(s,x1,x2(s))f_{20}(s,x_1,x_2(s))f20​(s,x1​,x2​(s)). The aim is to minimize the expected cost

f10(x1)+∫Sf20(s,x1,x2(s)) σ(ds).f_{10}(x_1)+\int_S f_{20}(s,x_1,x_2(s))\,\sigma(ds).f10​(x1​)+∫S​f20​(s,x1​,x2​(s))σ(ds).

The standing assumptions are: C1C_1C1​, C2C_2C2​ convex, closed and nonempty; f1if_{1i}f1i​ and f2i(s,⋅,⋅)f_{2i}(s,\cdot,\cdot)f2i​(s,⋅,⋅) convex and finite everywhere; s↦f2i(s,x1,x2)s\mapsto f_{2i}(s,x_1,x_2)s↦f2i​(s,x1​,x2​) measurable, summable for i=0i=0i=0 and bounded for i≥1i\ge 1i≥1.

Decisions live in X=Rn1×Ln2∞X=\mathbb R^{n_1}\times\mathcal L^\infty_{n_2}X=Rn1​×Ln2​∞​ and perturbations in U=Rm1×Lm2∞U=\mathbb R^{m_1}\times\mathcal L^\infty_{m_2}U=Rm1​×Lm2​∞​. The perturbation functional F(x,u)F(x,u)F(x,u) is the expected cost if xxx satisfies the constraints with right-hand sides u1u_1u1​ and, almost surely, u2(s)u_2(s)u2​(s), and +∞+\infty+∞ otherwise. The problem P\mathbf PP minimizes F(x,0)F(x,0)F(x,0).

The space Y=Rm1×Lm21Y=\mathbb R^{m_1}\times\mathcal L^1_{m_2}Y=Rm1​×Lm2​1​ is paired with UUU by ⟨u,y⟩=u1⋅y1+∫Su2(s)⋅y2(s) σ(ds)\langle u,y\rangle=u_1\cdot y_1+\int_S u_2(s)\cdot y_2(s)\,\sigma(ds)⟨u,y⟩=u1​⋅y1​+∫S​u2​(s)⋅y2​(s)σ(ds), and V=Rn1×Ln21V=\mathbb R^{n_1}\times\mathcal L^1_{n_2}V=Rn1​×Ln2​1​ with XXX in the same way. The Lagrangian is L(x,y)=inf⁡u∈U{⟨u,y⟩+F(x,u)}L(x,y)=\inf_{u\in U}\{\langle u,y\rangle+F(x,u)\}L(x,y)=infu∈U​{⟨u,y⟩+F(x,u)}, the dual D\mathbf DD maximizes g(y)=inf⁡x∈XL(x,y)g(y)=\inf_{x\in X}L(x,y)g(y)=infx∈X​L(x,y) over y∈Yy\in Yy∈Y, and the perturbation function is φ(u)=inf⁡x∈XF(x,u)\varphi(u)=\inf_{x\in X}F(x,u)φ(u)=infx∈X​F(x,u). Conjugates φ∗\varphi^*φ∗, φ∗∗\varphi^{**}φ∗∗ are taken with respect to the pairing of UUU with YYY.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3

If C1C_1C1​ and C2C_2C2​ are bounded, then

min⁡P=sup⁡D>−∞,\min\mathbf P=\sup\mathbf D>-\infty,minP=supD>−∞,

and in fact φ\varphiφ is a proper convex function on UUU, lower semicontinuous for the weak topology σ(U,Y)\sigma(U,Y)σ(U,Y), the infimum defining φ(u)\varphi(u)φ(u) is attained for every u∈Uu\in Uu∈U, and φ∗∗=φ\varphi^{**}=\varphiφ∗∗=φ. The goal is the theorem exactly as printed, all conclusions included.

Milestones

  1. p. 174: for bounded measurable x1(⋅)x_1(\cdot)x1​(⋅), x2(⋅)x_2(\cdot)x2​(⋅), the functions s↦f2i(s,x1(s),x2(s))s\mapsto f_{2i}(s,x_1(s),x_2(s))s↦f2i​(s,x1​(s),x2​(s)) are measurable, summable for i=0i=0i=0 and essentially bounded for i≥1i\ge1i≥1.
  2. Proposition 3: FFF is convex, not identically +∞+\infty+∞, and lower semicontinuous on X×UX\times UX×U for the norm topology and for the weak topology induced by V×YV\times YV×Y.
  3. (4.9): with C1,C2C_1,C_2C1​,C2​ bounded, X0={x:x1∈C1, x2(s)∈C2 a.s.}X_0=\{x: x_1\in C_1,\ x_2(s)\in C_2\text{ a.s.}\}X0​={x:x1​∈C1​, x2​(s)∈C2​ a.s.} is weakly compact in XXX, and X0′={x2∈Ln2∞:x2(s)∈C2 a.s.}X_0'=\{x_2\in\mathcal L^\infty_{n_2}: x_2(s)\in C_2\text{ a.s.}\}X0′​={x2​∈Ln2​∞​:x2​(s)∈C2​ a.s.} is compact in σ(Ln2∞,Ln21)\sigma(\mathcal L^\infty_{n_2},\mathcal L^1_{n_2})σ(Ln2​∞​,Ln2​1​).
  4. (4.1): g(y)=inf⁡u{⟨u,y⟩+φ(u)}=−φ∗(−y)g(y)=\inf_{u}\{\langle u,y\rangle+\varphi(u)\}=-\varphi^*(-y)g(y)=infu​{⟨u,y⟩+φ(u)}=−φ∗(−y).
  5. (4.2): φ∗∗(0)=sup⁡D\varphi^{**}(0)=\sup\mathbf Dφ∗∗(0)=supD.

The mission also poses the explicit form (1.8) of the Lagrangian and Corollary 1 (dual solutions are the negatives of subgradients of φ\varphiφ at 000; saddle-point characterization of primal solutions when ∂φ(0)≠∅\partial\varphi(0)\ne\emptyset∂φ(0)=∅).

Significance

Theorem 3 gives, for bounded constraint sets, the absence of a duality gap between a convex recourse problem with essentially bounded decisions and its Lagrangian dual over integrable multipliers, together with existence of an optimal decision. Through Corollary 1 it reduces the necessity of the Kuhn–Tucker (saddle-point) optimality conditions to the single question whether ∂φ(0)\partial\varphi(0)∂φ(0) is nonempty, and through the paper's later results it describes the directional derivatives of the optimal value with respect to perturbations of the constraints.

The result has been proved since 1976; it has not been machine-checked. A formal development produces the problem model on L∞\mathcal L^\inftyL∞ and L1\mathcal L^1L1 spaces, the weak topologies of the pairings, and conjugate duality for extended-real-valued functions on such paired spaces, none of which is currently available as a ready-made Lean statement on this platform.

Difficulty

The obvious argument fails at two points. First, inf⁡P=sup⁡D\inf\mathbf P=\sup\mathbf DinfP=supD is φ(0)=φ∗∗(0)\varphi(0)=\varphi^{**}(0)φ(0)=φ∗∗(0), and the biconjugate equals φ\varphiφ only for a lower semicontinuous proper convex function in a topology compatible with the pairing. Lower semicontinuity of φ\varphiφ in the norm topology of UUU is not enough: the pairing is with L1\mathcal L^1L1, not with the norm dual of L∞\mathcal L^\inftyL∞, so the relevant topology is the weak topology σ(U,Y)\sigma(U,Y)σ(U,Y), and an infimum of lower semicontinuous functions is in general not lower semicontinuous. Second, the lower semicontinuity of FFF itself, in the weak topology, is a statement about convex integral functionals on L∞\mathcal L^\inftyL∞ that rests on measurability of the integrands in sss jointly with continuity in the decision variables. Boundedness of C1C_1C1​, C2C_2C2​ is what supplies the compactness that is otherwise missing.

Formalization scope

  • Rn\mathbb R^nRn is Fin n → ℝ and the products u1⋅y1u_1\cdot y_1u1​⋅y1​, u2(s)⋅y2(s)u_2(s)\cdot y_2(s)u2​(s)⋅y2​(s) are dot products. Constraint indices i=1,…,mi=1,\dots,mi=1,…,m are Fin m.
  • Ln∞\mathcal L^\infty_nLn∞​ and Ln1\mathcal L^1_nLn1​ are Mathlib's Lp (Fin n → ℝ) ⊤ σ and Lp (Fin n → ℝ) 1 σ, spaces of almost-everywhere classes; all second-stage conditions are stated almost surely. σ\sigmaσ is a probability measure (IsProbabilityMeasure).
  • Values in R∪{±∞}\mathbb R\cup\{\pm\infty\}R∪{±∞} are EReal; infima and suprema are lattice operations in EReal, so there are no junk values for empty or unbounded sets. Every sum has a real first summand, so no ∞−∞\infty-\infty∞−∞ convention enters.
  • The expected cost is a real Bochner integral; its integrand is summable for x2∈L∞x_2\in\mathcal L^\inftyx2​∈L∞ (milestone 1), so it is the true expected cost. No extended-real-valued function is ever integrated.
  • A weak topology "induced by the pairing" is the coarsest topology making every functional of the pairing continuous; the product weak topology on X×UX\times UX×U is the product of the two. These are passed explicitly. Replacing them by the norm topologies would make the lower semicontinuity statements strictly weaker and the compactness statement false; such a formalization does not count.
  • An extended-real function is convex when its epigraph is convex, and proper when it never takes −∞-\infty−∞ and is somewhere finite.
  • Boundedness of C1C_1C1​, C2C_2C2​ is assumed exactly where the paper assumes it: Theorem 3, (4.9) and Corollary 1.

A complete development needs the identification of L∞\mathcal L^\inftyL∞ with the dual of L1\mathcal L^1L1 on a probability space (for weak-* compactness), lower semicontinuity of convex integral functionals, and conjugate duality on paired locally convex spaces. These are reusable well beyond this mission. Proofs of milestones, and of auxiliary lemmas of this kind as separate theorems, are welcome. The mission Stochastic Convex Programming: Basic Duality 2 formalizes the paper's other main result, on the first-stage problem and attainment of the recourse.

Selected references

  • R. T. Rockafellar and R. J.-B. Wets, Stochastic convex programming: basic duality, Pacific Journal of Mathematics 62(1) (1976) 173–195. https://doi.org/10.2140/pjm.1976.62.173
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Conjugate Duality and Optimization, CBMS-NSF Regional Conference Series in Applied Mathematics 16, SIAM, 1974. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9781611970524
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Integrals which are convex functionals, Pacific Journal of Mathematics 24(3) (1968) 525–539. https://doi.org/10.2140/pjm.1968.24.525
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Integrals which are convex functionals, II, Pacific Journal of Mathematics 39(2) (1971) 439–469. https://doi.org/10.2140/pjm.1971.39.439
  • R. J.-B. Wets, Stochastic programs with fixed recourse: the equivalent deterministic program, SIAM Review 16(3) (1974) 309–339. https://doi.org/10.1137/1016053
8 thms1 active userReviewed
Linear algebraOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Strongly Regular Generalized Equations II: Schur-Complement Criterion — A₁₁ Nonsingular and (A/A₁₁) Positive Definite Make (A + ∂ψ_{ℝʳ×K})⁻¹ Lipschitz on ℝ^{r+s}; for K = ℝˢ₊, P-Matrix IffResearch Paper

Motivation

A constrained system can be written as a generalized equation: a smooth or linear expression must balance the normal cone of a feasible set. This form includes variational inequalities and the first-order conditions of many optimization problems. It is useful to know whether a small change in the right-hand side determines one nearby solution and how far that solution moves. In the linear finite-dimensional case, Robinson's Theorem 3.1 gives matrix conditions that guarantee something stronger: a unique solution for every right-hand side, with one Lipschitz bound valid over the entire space. The theorem also identifies an exact matrix criterion when the feasible set is a product with a nonnegative orthant.

The question is relevant whenever some coordinates of a system are free and others are constrained by inequalities. Eliminating the free coordinates produces a smaller matrix, the Schur complement. The resulting condition can be checked on the reduced block, and in the orthant case it becomes the familiar P-matrix criterion from linear complementarity. Robinson states both claims in a single theorem and relates them to the behavior of a generalized equation rather than to an isolated matrix property Robinson, pp. 51–52.

Setting

Let r,sr,sr,s be positive integers and give Rr+s\mathbb R^{r+s}Rr+s its Euclidean norm. Write w=(w1,w2)w=(w_1,w_2)w=(w1​,w2​), with w1∈Rrw_1\in\mathbb R^rw1​∈Rr and w2∈Rsw_2\in\mathbb R^sw2​∈Rs. Let K⊆RsK\subseteq\mathbb R^sK⊆Rs be nonempty, closed, and convex, and put D=Rr×KD=\mathbb R^r\times KD=Rr×K. For w∈Dw\in Dw∈D, the normal cone is

ND(w)={v∈Rr+s:⟨v,c−w⟩≤0 for every c∈D}.N_D(w)=\{v\in\mathbb R^{r+s}:\langle v,c-w\rangle\leq0\text{ for every }c\in D\}.ND​(w)={v∈Rr+s:⟨v,c−w⟩≤0 for every c∈D}.

For w∉Dw\notin Dw∈/D, ND(w)N_D(w)ND​(w) is empty. Thus the inclusion y∈Aw+ND(w)y\in Aw+N_D(w)y∈Aw+ND​(w) itself enforces feasibility. This is Robinson's indicator-subdifferential convention Robinson, pp. 43 and 51.

Partition the real square matrix AAA into blocks A11A_{11}A11​, A12A_{12}A12​, A21A_{21}A21​, and A22A_{22}A22​, where A11A_{11}A11​ is r×rr\times rr×r. When A11A_{11}A11​ is nonsingular, its Schur complement in AAA is

A/A11=A22−A21A11−1A12.A/A_{11}=A_{22}-A_{21}A_{11}^{-1}A_{12}.A/A11​=A22​−A21​A11−1​A12​.

A real matrix MMM is positive definite in the theorem's sense when v⊤Mv>0v^\top Mv>0v⊤Mv>0 for every nonzero vvv. Symmetry is not assumed. A P-matrix has strictly positive determinants for every nonempty principal submatrix. Write R+s\mathbb R^s_+R+s​ for the vectors with all components nonnegative. These conventions are stated or used in Theorem 3.1 and its proof.

Formalization targets

General closed convex set

For TK(w)=Aw+NRr×K(w)T_K(w)=Aw+N_{\mathbb R^r\times K}(w)TK​(w)=Aw+NRr×K​(w), the first target is the sufficient condition

det⁡A11≠0andv⊤(A/A11)v>0  (v≠0)⟹TK−1:Rr+s→Rr+s is Lipschitz.\det A_{11}\ne0\quad\text{and}\quad v^\top(A/A_{11})v>0\;(v\ne0) \quad\Longrightarrow\quad T_K^{-1}:\mathbb R^{r+s}\to\mathbb R^{r+s}\text{ is Lipschitz}.detA11​=0andv⊤(A/A11​)v>0(v=0)⟹TK−1​:Rr+s→Rr+s is Lipschitz.

Here “is Lipschitz” includes that exactly one inverse value exists at every yyy. The assertion holds for every nonempty closed convex KKK; it is not restricted to polyhedral sets.

Nonnegative orthant

When K=R+sK=\mathbb R^s_+K=R+s​, the second target is an equivalence:

TR+s−1 is everywhere defined, single-valued and Lipschitz⟺det⁡A11≠0 and A/A11 is a P-matrix.T_{\mathbb R^s_+}^{-1}\text{ is everywhere defined, single-valued and Lipschitz} \quad\Longleftrightarrow\quad \det A_{11}\ne0\text{ and }A/A_{11}\text{ is a P-matrix}.TR+s​−1​ is everywhere defined, single-valued and Lipschitz⟺detA11​=0 and A/A11​ is a P-matrix.

The goal theorem is the conjunction of these two statements, matching Theorem 3.1. Its milestones record the paper's local upper Lipschitz assertion for polyhedral multifunctions, the block reduction, the reduced inverse result, the complementarity characterization, and the necessity of nonsingularity.

Significance

The first part gives a global sensitivity guarantee for a generalized equation with an arbitrary nonempty closed convex lower-block constraint. For any two right-hand sides, their unique solutions differ by at most a fixed multiple of the distance between those right-hand sides. The second part tells when this guarantee holds for the orthant model: the P-matrix condition is necessary as well as sufficient. These are the precise conclusions of Robinson's theorem; the mission concerns their machine-checked formalization, not an unresolved mathematical conjecture.

A complete development would provide reusable definitions of the normal-cone generalized equation, an explicitly nonsymmetric notion of positive definiteness, P-matrices, and the global inverse property. It would also formalize the linear complementarity characterization quoted in the paper. The current draft has Lean-checked statements with proof placeholders. No proof of Theorem 3.1 or of its milestones is claimed here.

Difficulty

Nonsingularity of the full matrix AAA alone does not decide whether the constrained inverse exists uniquely: the normal cone can change as w2w_2w2​ reaches different faces of KKK. A pointwise uniqueness argument also does not by itself supply one Lipschitz constant on all of Rr+s\mathbb R^{r+s}Rr+s. For the orthant case, checking only the full determinant or leading principal minors would miss the criterion Robinson invokes; every nonempty principal minor matters. The difficulty is to connect a global statement about all right-hand sides with the reduced matrix condition while preserving the normal cone's behavior at boundary points Robinson, pp. 51–52.

Formalization scope

Lean represents Rr+s\mathbb R^{r+s}Rr+s as a Euclidean space indexed by the disjoint union of Fin(r)\mathrm{Fin}(r)Fin(r) and Fin(s)\mathrm{Fin}(s)Fin(s). This gives the paper's Euclidean norm rather than the sup norm of a product type. The normal cone is empty off its set, and the inverse property explicitly requires existence for every right-hand side, uniqueness, and one global real Lipschitz bound. The Schur complement appears only with a nonsingular A11A_{11}A11​ in the substantive claims; matrix inversion on a singular input would otherwise be totalized by Lean. Positive definiteness does not add a symmetry hypothesis. The goal retains r,s>0r,s>0r,s>0 as printed; the paper's later remark about zero-dimensional blocks is outside this theorem.

The polyhedral milestones use finite intersections of closed half-spaces. The reduced-operator milestone uses a nonempty closed convex KKK, matching the theorem's setting. The LCP milestone allows any finite dimension; at dimension zero, both its universal uniqueness statement and its empty-minor P-matrix condition hold. A weaker encoding in which the inverse is merely single-valued where it happens to exist would erase the global conclusion and is excluded here.

Solvers can contribute the block-normal-cone equivalence, the global inverse statement for the reduced operator, the polyhedral Lipschitz result, the P-matrix characterization, and the final theorem. The normal-cone and matrix definitions can also serve later generalized-equation missions that use the same conventions.

Selected references

  • S. M. Robinson, Strongly Regular Generalized Equations, Mathematics of Operations Research 5(1), 43–62, 1980. DOI 10.1287/moor.5.1.43.
8 thms1 active userReviewed
🏆Completed
Functional AnalysisOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Strongly Regular Generalized Equations I: Implicit-Function Theorem — the Solution x(p) of 0 ∈ f(p, x) + ∂ψ_C(x) Is Locally Unique with ‖x(p) − x(q)‖ ≤ (λ + ε)‖f(p, x(q)) − f(q, x(q))‖Research Paper

Motivation

Many problems of optimization and equilibrium can be written as one inclusion. Some examples are the Karush–Kuhn–Tucker conditions of a nonlinear program, nonlinear complementarity problems, variational inequalities and the equilibrium conditions of economic and traffic models. In each of them a point xxx has to satisfy 0∈f(x)+∂ψC(x)0 \in f(x) + \partial\psi_C(x)0∈f(x)+∂ψC​(x). In applications the data fff depend on parameters: estimated coefficients, prices, or the iterate of an algorithm. One then wants to know whether a solution persists under a perturbation of the parameter, whether it stays locally unique, and how fast it moves. For a smooth equation f(p,x)=0f(p, x) = 0f(p,x)=0 the classical implicit-function theorem answers all three questions. Inequality constraints make the solution set nonsmooth, and the classical theorem no longer applies.

S. M. Robinson's paper Strongly regular generalized equations (Math. Oper. Res. 5 (1980) 43–62) introduced the condition of strong regularity and proved an implicit-function theorem for generalized equations under it. The condition and the theorem became the starting point of the stability theory of variational inequalities and nonlinear programs. Later work characterises strong regularity for nonlinear programs (Robinson's own §4, through the strong second-order sufficient condition), and develops it in the theory of metric regularity and of single-valued Lipschitz localisations (Dontchev–Rockafellar, Implicit Functions and Solution Mappings, Springer 2009/2014). Its sensitivity results underlie the convergence analysis of Newton and sequential quadratic programming methods for these problems.

This mission formalizes §1–§2 of the paper: the definition, the implicit-function theorem (Theorem 2.1) with its proof, and the three results derived from it.

Setting

Let XXX be a real normed linear space and X′X'X′ its topological dual, the continuous linear functionals on XXX. Let C⊆XC \subseteq XC⊆X be closed and convex. The normal-cone operator of CCC is

∂ψC(x)={{y∈X′:y(c−x)≤0 for all c∈C},x∈C,∅,x∉C.\partial\psi_C(x) = \begin{cases} \{y \in X' : y(c - x) \le 0 \text{ for all } c \in C\}, & x \in C, \\ \emptyset, & x \notin C. \end{cases}∂ψC​(x)={{y∈X′:y(c−x)≤0 for all c∈C},∅,​x∈C,x∈/C.​

A generalized equation is the inclusion 0∈f(x)+∂ψC(x)0 \in f(x) + \partial\psi_C(x)0∈f(x)+∂ψC​(x), for a function fff from an open set Ω⊆X\Omega \subseteq XΩ⊆X to X′X'X′. For C=XC = XC=X it is the equation f(x)=0f(x) = 0f(x)=0. For CCC the nonnegative orthant of Rn\mathbb R^nRn it is the nonlinear complementarity problem. For a general closed convex CCC it is the variational inequality over CCC.

Let x0∈Ωx_0 \in \Omegax0​∈Ω solve the generalized equation, and let fff be Fréchet differentiable at x0x_0x0​. Linearising fff gives the multifunction

Tx=f(x0)+f′(x0)(x−x0)+∂ψC(x).T x = f(x_0) + f'(x_0)(x - x_0) + \partial\psi_C(x).Tx=f(x0​)+f′(x0​)(x−x0​)+∂ψC​(x).

The generalized equation is strongly regular at x0x_0x0​ with associated Lipschitz constant λ\lambdaλ if there are neighbourhoods UUU of 000 in X′X'X′ and VVV of x0x_0x0​ with the following property: for every y∈Uy \in Uy∈U the inclusion y∈Txy \in Txy∈Tx has exactly one solution s(y)s(y)s(y) in VVV, and ∥s(y1)−s(y2)∥≤λ∥y1−y2∥\|s(y_1) - s(y_2)\| \le \lambda \|y_1 - y_2\|∥s(y1​)−s(y2​)∥≤λ∥y1​−y2​∥ on UUU. The condition depends only on f(x0)f(x_0)f(x0​), f′(x0)f'(x_0)f′(x0​) and CCC.

In the parametric problem the function is f(p,x)f(p, x)f(p,x), with ppp in a topological space PPP and base point p0p_0p0​. Its partial derivative in xxx is f′(p,x)f'(p, x)f′(p,x).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2.1 (p. 45)

Assume that f′f'f′ exists on P×ΩP \times \OmegaP×Ω, that fff and f′f'f′ are continuous at (p0,x0)(p_0, x_0)(p0​,x0​), and that x0x_0x0​ solves 0∈f(p0,x)+∂ψC(x)0 \in f(p_0, x) + \partial\psi_C(x)0∈f(p0​,x)+∂ψC​(x), strongly regularly with constant λ\lambdaλ. Then for every ε>0\varepsilon > 0ε>0 there are neighbourhoods NεN_\varepsilonNε​ of p0p_0p0​ and WεW_\varepsilonWε​ of x0x_0x0​, and a function x:Nε→Wεx : N_\varepsilon \to W_\varepsilonx:Nε​→Wε​, with two properties. First, x(p)x(p)x(p) is the unique solution in WεW_\varepsilonWε​ of 0∈f(p,x)+∂ψC(x)0 \in f(p, x) + \partial\psi_C(x)0∈f(p,x)+∂ψC​(x). Second,

∥x(p)−x(q)∥≤(λ+ε) ∥f(p,x(q))−f(q,x(q))∥(p,q∈Nε).\|x(p) - x(q)\| \le (\lambda + \varepsilon)\,\|f(p, x(q)) - f(q, x(q))\| \qquad (p, q \in N_\varepsilon).∥x(p)−x(q)∥≤(λ+ε)∥f(p,x(q))−f(q,x(q))∥(p,q∈Nε​).

Milestones: the steps of the proof (p. 46)

Write LLL for the linearisation at (p0,x0)(p_0, x_0)(p0​,x0​), r(p,x)=f(p0,x0)+f′(p0,x0)(x−x0)−f(p,x)r(p, x) = f(p_0, x_0) + f'(p_0, x_0)(x - x_0) - f(p, x)r(p,x)=f(p0​,x0​)+f′(p0​,x0​)(x−x0​)−f(p,x) for the residual, and Φp(x)=V∩L−1[r(p,x)]\Phi_p(x) = V \cap L^{-1}[r(p, x)]Φp​(x)=V∩L−1[r(p,x)]. The milestones are four claims of the proof:

  1. On the closed ball VεV_\varepsilonVε​, the fixed points of Φp\Phi_pΦp​ are exactly the solutions of the perturbed inclusion.
  2. ∥Φp(x1)−Φp(x2)∥≤λδ∥x1−x2∥\|\Phi_p(x_1) - \Phi_p(x_2)\| \le \lambda\delta \|x_1 - x_2\|∥Φp​(x1​)−Φp​(x2​)∥≤λδ∥x1​−x2​∥ on VεV_\varepsilonVε​.
  3. Φp\Phi_pΦp​ maps VεV_\varepsilonVε​ into itself.
  4. The contraction principle on VεV_\varepsilonVε​, with the bound ∥x(p)−x∥≤(1−λδ)−1∥Φp(x)−x∥\|x(p) - x\| \le (1 - \lambda\delta)^{-1} \|\Phi_p(x) - x\|∥x(p)−x∥≤(1−λδ)−1∥Φp​(x)−x∥ (2.5).

Companion results

  • Corollary 2.2 (pp. 46–47). If PPP lies in a normed space and ∥f(p,x)−f(q,x)∥≤ν∥p−q∥\|f(p, x) - f(q, x)\| \le \nu \|p - q\|∥f(p,x)−f(q,x)∥≤ν∥p−q∥, then x(⋅)x(\cdot)x(⋅) is Lipschitzian with modulus ν(λ+ε)\nu(\lambda + \varepsilon)ν(λ+ε).
  • Theorem 2.3 (p. 47). Let Φp(x0)\Phi_p(x_0)Φp​(x0​) be the unique local solution of the linear generalized equation 0∈f(p,x0)+f′(p0,x0)(x−x0)+∂ψC(x)0 \in f(p, x_0) + f'(p_0, x_0)(x - x_0) + \partial\psi_C(x)0∈f(p,x0​)+f′(p0​,x0​)(x−x0​)+∂ψC​(x). Then ∥x(p)−Φp(x0)∥≤αε(p)∥p−p0∥\|x(p) - \Phi_p(x_0)\| \le \alpha_\varepsilon(p)\|p - p_0\|∥x(p)−Φp​(x0​)∥≤αε​(p)∥p−p0​∥, with αε(p)→0\alpha_\varepsilon(p) \to 0αε​(p)→0.
  • Theorem 2.4 (p. 48). This is a perturbation lemma for linear generalized equations 0∈Ax+a+∂ψC(x)0 \in Ax + a + \partial\psi_C(x)0∈Ax+a+∂ψC​(x). Near (A0,a0)(A_0, a_0)(A0​,a0​) the localised inverse stays single-valued, and it is Lipschitzian with modulus λ(1−λ∥A−A0∥)−1\lambda(1 - \lambda\|A - A_0\|)^{-1}λ(1−λ∥A−A0​∥)−1.
  • The case C=XC = XC=X (remark on p. 45). There strong regularity is equivalent to f′(x0)f'(x_0)f′(x0​) having a continuous linear inverse.
  • Strong regularity is the weakest possible condition (remark on p. 47). For the canonical perturbation f(p,x)=f(x0)+f′(x0)(x−x0)−pf(p,x) = f(x_0) + f'(x_0)(x - x_0) - pf(p,x)=f(x0​)+f′(x0​)(x−x0​)−p, p∈X′p \in X'p∈X′, locally unique solvability with a Lipschitzian solution map x(⋅)x(\cdot)x(⋅) near p0=0p_0 = 0p0​=0 is exactly strong regularity at x0x_0x0​.

Significance

Theorem 2.1 reduces the stability of a nonsmooth problem to a property of one linearised problem at the base point. Once strong regularity is checked at x0x_0x0​, the solution exists, is locally unique and moves in a Lipschitz manner for every nearby parameter. Corollary 2.2 and Theorem 2.3 make this quantitative. Theorem 2.3 shows that a linear complementarity problem or a quadratic program approximates the nonlinear solution to first order. Theorem 2.4 is the analogue of Banach's perturbation lemma, which keeps an operator invertible under small perturbations. The later sections of the paper give checkable criteria for strong regularity: a Schur-complement test, a reduced-form test over polyhedral sets, and second-order conditions for nonlinear programs. Those criteria are the subject of the companion missions II–IV.

The theorems have been proved since 1980 and have been restated in textbooks. No machine-checked version of strong regularity or of this implicit-function theorem is known. Mathlib has the classical implicit- and inverse-function theorems for C1C^1C1 maps between Banach spaces, and the contraction mapping principle. It has nothing on normal-cone operators, generalized equations or Lipschitz localisations. The formalization adds this layer. It also shows that Theorem 2.1 needs no completeness of XXX.

Difficulty

The obvious approach is to apply the classical implicit-function theorem. It fails because x↦f(x)+∂ψC(x)x \mapsto f(x) + \partial\psi_C(x)x↦f(x)+∂ψC​(x) is set-valued and is not differentiable in any useful sense. The inverse is localised only to a neighbourhood VVV and is single-valued only there. So every step must keep the iterates inside sets on which strong regularity says something. The neighbourhoods have to be chosen in the right order: δ\deltaδ from ε\varepsilonε, then UUU and VVV, then the ball radius ρ\rhoρ, then the parameter neighbourhood. The estimate (2.4) has to come out with the constant λ+ε\lambda + \varepsilonλ+ε and no larger. The page applies the contraction principle in a space it calls only normed. A faithful proof must also obtain the fixed point without completeness of XXX, for example through the completeness of X′X'X′.

Formalization scope

  • X′X'X′ is StrongDual ℝ X, the normal cone is a Set (StrongDual ℝ X) that is empty off CCC, and an inclusion 0∈f(x)+∂ψC(x)0 \in f(x) + \partial\psi_C(x)0∈f(x)+∂ψC​(x) is written −f(x)∈∂ψC(x)-f(x) \in \partial\psi_C(x)−f(x)∈∂ψC​(x).
  • Strong regularity is a predicate on (C,f(x0),f′(x0),x0,λ)(C, f(x_0), f'(x_0), x_0, \lambda)(C,f(x0​),f′(x0​),x0​,λ) with real λ\lambdaλ. It requires existence, uniqueness in VVV and the Lipschitz bound.
  • fff is a total function P×X→X′P \times X \to X'P×X→X′ whose values off P×ΩP \times \OmegaP×Ω carry no hypothesis. The conclusion therefore asserts Wε⊆ΩW_\varepsilon \subseteq \OmegaWε​⊆Ω.
  • Differentiability is HasFDerivAt at every point of Ω\OmegaΩ, for every ppp. Continuity of f′f'f′ at (p0,x0)(p_0, x_0)(p0​,x0​) is joint and in operator norm.
  • Uniqueness is uniqueness within WεW_\varepsilonWε​, never global. Global uniqueness is false in general. Dropping uniqueness, or quantifying ε\varepsilonε after the neighbourhoods, would trivialize the goal, and the statements are written to exclude both.
  • Theorem 2.1, Corollary 2.2 and Theorem 2.3 do not assume completeness, as printed. Theorem 2.4 assumes a Banach space, as printed.
  • The contraction-principle milestone assumes completeness, under which the principle as invoked holds.
  • Corollary 2.2 asks for its Lipschitz hypothesis on Nε×VεN_\varepsilon \times V_\varepsilonNε​×Vε​, sets that Theorem 2.1 produces. It is therefore stated on fixed neighbourhoods given in advance.
  • Theorem 2.4 also asserts λ∥A−A0∥<1\lambda\|A - A_0\| < 1λ∥A−A0​∥<1, which its proof secures.

A complete development needs the following:

  • the mean-value inequality for Fréchet-differentiable maps on convex sets;
  • the contraction principle on a closed ball;
  • a fixed-point argument that obtains the fixed point through the complete space X′X'X′.

The definitions of normal cone and strong regularity are reusable for variational inequalities in general. Contributions are welcome at any level: proofs of the milestones, the goal from the milestones, or the companion results from the goal.

Selected references

  • S. M. Robinson, Strongly regular generalized equations, Mathematics of Operations Research 5(1):43–62, 1980. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.5.1.43
  • A. L. Dontchev and R. T. Rockafellar, Implicit Functions and Solution Mappings, 2nd ed., Springer, 2014. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-1-4939-1037-3
6 thms1 active userReviewed
OptimizationProbabilityStatistics·Captain: mikedeng1

Asymptotic Theory for Solutions in Statistical Estimation and Stochastic Programming: Generalized M-Estimates Converge in Distribution to the Inverse Contingent Derivative at a GaussianResearch Paper

Motivation

Maximum likelihood estimates, least-squares fits and sample-average approximations of stochastic programs solve 0=fˉν(x)0 = \bar f^\nu(x)0=fˉ​ν(x), where fˉν\bar f^\nufˉ​ν averages a random integrand over ν\nuν observations. Their classical asymptotic theory rests on the implicit function theorem and needs a smooth, unconstrained problem.

When the estimate is constrained to a set, for example a nonnegativity constraint, a simplex or a polyhedron, the first-order conditions become a generalized equation

0∈f(z,x)+N(x),0 \in f(z, x) + N(x),0∈f(z,x)+N(x),

where NNN is a multifunction such as the normal cone of the constraint set. The same form describes optimality conditions of stochastic programs and variational inequalities. Aitchison and Silvey (1958) treated equality-constrained maximum likelihood. Huber (1967) allowed nonsmooth estimating functions but required an open parameter domain. Dupačová and Wets (1988) and Shapiro (1989) derived limit laws for solutions of stochastic programs under smoothness of the expected gradient. King and Rockafellar (1993) gave a general theory that needs neither smoothness of the expected map nor single-valuedness of NNN: the limit law of the normalized error is the image of a Gaussian under a contingent derivative, a positively homogeneous and generally nonlinear map, so the limit is generally not normal.

Setting

Let ZZZ be a separable Banach space with norm ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥, and let ∣⋅∣|\cdot|∣⋅∣ be the Euclidean norm on Rn\mathbb R^nRn and Rm\mathbb R^mRm. A multifunction G:Z⇉RnG : Z \rightrightarrows \mathbb R^nG:Z⇉Rn assigns a set G(z)⊆RnG(z) \subseteq \mathbb R^nG(z)⊆Rn to each zzz. Its graph is gph⁡G\operatorname{gph} GgphG and its inverse is G−1(x)={z∣x∈G(z)}G^{-1}(x) = \{z \mid x \in G(z)\}G−1(x)={z∣x∈G(z)}.

For sets AtA_tAt​ indexed by t↓0t \downarrow 0t↓0, the upper limit lim sup⁡At\limsup A_tlimsupAt​ consists of the points xxx with x=lim⁡xkx = \lim x_kx=limxk​, xk∈Atkx_k \in A_{t_k}xk​∈Atk​​ for some tk↓0t_k \downarrow 0tk​↓0, and the lower limit of the points reachable along every such sequence. The contingent derivative of GGG at (z,x)∈gph⁡G(z, x) \in \operatorname{gph} G(z,x)∈gphG is the multifunction DG(z∣x)DG(z|x)DG(z∣x) with

gph⁡DG(z∣x)=lim sup⁡t↓0t−1[gph⁡G−(z,x)].\operatorname{gph} DG(z|x) = \limsup_{t \downarrow 0} t^{-1}\big[\operatorname{gph} G - (z,x)\big].gphDG(z∣x)=t↓0limsup​t−1[gphG−(z,x)].

GGG is proto-differentiable when this upper limit equals the lower limit, and semi-differentiable when t−1[G(z+tw′)−x]→DG(z∣x)(w)t^{-1}[G(z + t w') - x] \to DG(z|x)(w)t−1[G(z+tw′)−x]→DG(z∣x)(w) as t↓0t \downarrow 0t↓0 and w′→ww' \to ww′→w. A single-valued ggg is B-differentiable at zzz when t−1[g(z+tw′)−g(z)]→Dg(z)(w)t^{-1}[g(z + tw') - g(z)] \to Dg(z)(w)t−1[g(z+tw′)−g(z)]→Dg(z)(w) in the same sense.

The deterministic problem is 0∈f(z,x)+N(x)0 \in f(z, x) + N(x)0∈f(z,x)+N(x) with f:Z×Rn→Rmf : Z \times \mathbb R^n \to \mathbb R^mf:Z×Rn→Rm, data zzz and solution map J(z)J(z)J(z). At a reference pair (z∗,x∗)(z^*, x^*)(z∗,x∗) set F=f(z∗,⋅)+NF = f(z^*, \cdot) + NF=f(z∗,⋅)+N. The analytical assumptions M.1–M.4 are as follows. fff is jointly continuous and B-differentiable in each variable, with the zzz-derivative Dzf(z∗,x∗)D_z f(z^*, x^*)Dz​f(z∗,x∗) strong (uniform in xxx near x∗x^*x∗). NNN is closed and proto-differentiable. FFF is subinvertible: 0∈F(x∗)0 \in F(x^*)0∈F(x∗), and a closed-graph, convex-valued selection of F−1F^{-1}F−1 near 000 passes through x∗x^*x∗. The contingent derivative DF−1(0∣x∗)DF^{-1}(0|x^*)DF−1(0∣x∗) is at most single-valued.

The statistical problem has i.i.d. random elements s1,s2,…s_1, s_2, \dotss1​,s2​,… of a measurable space SSS and an integrand f:U×S→Rmf : U \times S \to \mathbb R^mf:U×S→Rm on a compact neighborhood UUU of x∗x^*x∗. It satisfies the probabilistic assumptions P.1–P.4: continuity in xxx, measurability in sss, a finite second moment at one point, and a Lipschitz bound ∣f(x1,s)−f(x2,s)∣≤a(s)∣x1−x2∣|f(x_1,s) - f(x_2,s)| \le a(s)|x_1 - x_2|∣f(x1​,s)−f(x2​,s)∣≤a(s)∣x1​−x2​∣ with Ea(s1)2<∞E a(s_1)^2 < \inftyEa(s1​)2<∞. The M-estimate xνx^\nuxν is a measurable solution of

0∈fˉν(x)+N(x),fˉν(x)=1ν∑i=1νf(x,si),0 \in \bar f^\nu(x) + N(x), \qquad \bar f^\nu(x) = \frac1\nu\sum_{i=1}^\nu f(x, s_i),0∈fˉ​ν(x)+N(x),fˉ​ν(x)=ν1​i=1∑ν​f(x,si​),

and the true equation is 0∈Ef(x)+N(x)0 \in Ef(x) + N(x)0∈Ef(x)+N(x) with F=Ef+NF = Ef + NF=Ef+N.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2.7 (asymptotic distribution of M-estimates)

Under P.1–P.4 on a compact neighborhood UUU of x∗x^*x∗, B-differentiability of EfEfEf at x∗x^*x∗, and M.2–M.4 for F=Ef+NF = Ef + NF=Ef+N, every sequence of measurable solutions xνx^\nuxν of (2.5) with xν→x∗x^\nu \to x^*xν→x∗ almost surely satisfies

ν [xν−x∗]→ D DF−1(0∣x∗)(−w∗),w∗∼N(0,cov⁡f(x∗,s1)).\sqrt\nu\,[x^\nu - x^*] \xrightarrow{\ \mathcal D\ } DF^{-1}(0|x^*)(-w^*), \qquad w^* \sim \mathcal N\big(0, \operatorname{cov} f(x^*, s_1)\big).ν​[xν−x∗] D ​DF−1(0∣x∗)(−w∗),w∗∼N(0,covf(x∗,s1​)).

The goal fixes the limit law completely: the map is the contingent derivative of F−1F^{-1}F−1, and the Gaussian has the covariance of the integrand at x∗x^*x∗.

Milestones

  • Theorem 2.4 gives bounds in probability, P{∣xν−x∗∣>δ}≤P{αλ∥zν−z∗∥>δ}P\{|x^\nu - x^*| > \delta\} \le P\{\alpha\lambda\|z^\nu - z^*\| > \delta\}P{∣xν−x∗∣>δ}≤P{αλ∥zν−z∗∥>δ}. Its proof uses the upper-Lipschitz property U∩F−1(y)⊆x∗+λ∣y∣BU \cap F^{-1}(y) \subseteq x^* + \lambda|y|BU∩F−1(y)⊆x∗+λ∣y∣B (a display of the proof).
  • Theorem 2.6 is the abstract limit theorem: if τν−1[zν−z∗]→Dw\tau_\nu^{-1}[z^\nu - z^*] \to_{\mathcal D} wτν−1​[zν−z∗]→D​w, then τν−1[xν−x∗]→DDF−1(0∣x∗)(−Dzf(z∗,x∗)(w))\tau_\nu^{-1}[x^\nu - x^*] \to_{\mathcal D} DF^{-1}(0|x^*)(-D_z f(z^*,x^*)(w))τν−1​[xν−x∗]→D​DF−1(0∣x∗)(−Dz​f(z∗,x∗)(w)). Its proof uses two displays: semi-differentiability of the localized solution map, with DJ(z∗∣x∗)(w)=DF−1(0∣x∗)(−Dzf(z∗,x∗)(w))DJ(z^*|x^*)(w) = DF^{-1}(0|x^*)(-D_z f(z^*,x^*)(w))DJ(z∗∣x∗)(w)=DF−1(0∣x∗)(−Dz​f(z∗,x∗)(w)), and a Lipschitz bound ∣x−x∗∣≤λ∥z−z∗∥|x - x^*| \le \lambda\|z - z^*\|∣x−x∗∣≤λ∥z−z∗∥ on U∩J(z)U \cap J(z)U∩J(z).
  • Proposition A1, Corollary A2 and Theorem A3 concern the space Cm(U)C_m(U)Cm​(U) under P.1–P.4. The integrand and the empirical means are random elements of Cm(U)C_m(U)Cm​(U), and ν(fˉν−Ef)\sqrt\nu(\bar f^\nu - Ef)ν​(fˉ​ν−Ef) converges in distribution to a Gaussian element of Cm(U)C_m(U)Cm​(U).

The three displays (Theorem 2.4's upper-Lipschitz inclusion, and Theorem 2.6's semi-differentiability and Lipschitz bound) are statements the paper cites from King and Rockafellar, Sensitivity analysis for nonsmooth generalized equations ([12]: Proposition 2.1, Theorem 4.1, Remark 4.3). They are cited results, not this paper's own, and are milestones because the proofs of Theorems 2.4 and 2.6 rest on them.

Significance

Theorem 2.7 gives the limit law of constrained and nonsmooth M-estimates in a form that can be computed. When NNN is the normal cone of a polyhedron, DF−1(0∣x∗)DF^{-1}(0|x^*)DF−1(0∣x∗) is piecewise linear, and the limit is the solution of a random linear complementarity or quadratic problem driven by a Gaussian vector. This underlies the asymptotic theory of sample-average approximation in stochastic programming, where the paper applies it to stochastic programs (§3) and to piecewise linear-quadratic tracking problems (§4). Theorem 2.6 separates the deterministic sensitivity analysis from the probability, so any data sequence with a known limit law yields a limit law for the solutions.

The result is proved in the paper modulo the cited theorems of [12] and [11], but none of it is machine-checked. Mathlib has the real-valued i.i.d. central limit theorem, Gaussian measures on Banach spaces and convergence in distribution. It has no multivariate or Banach-space central limit theorem, no contingent derivatives and no set-valued implicit function theorem. Formalizing the mission produces these, along with a checked version of the cited sensitivity results.

Difficulty

The classical argument linearizes FFF at x∗x^*x∗, inverts the Jacobian and applies the delta method. Here FFF is set-valued and its derivative is only positively homogeneous. There is no Jacobian to invert, and the solution map need not be differentiable or even single-valued away from x∗x^*x∗. The replacement for the implicit function theorem is the semi-differentiability of the localized solution map under M.1–M.4. Proving it means controlling both the upper and the lower set limits of difference quotients of solution sets, and subinvertibility is what supplies existence of nearby solutions.

The probabilistic side cannot work coordinate by coordinate either. The estimate solves an equation in the whole function fˉν\bar f^\nufˉ​ν, so convergence of fˉν\bar f^\nufˉ​ν at finitely many points is not enough. The central limit theorem must hold in the sup norm on Cm(U)C_m(U)Cm​(U), which requires tightness of the empirical process, and only then can the deterministic sensitivity result be composed with it.

Formalization scope

Points live in EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n), and ZZZ is a real normed space with [CompleteSpace Z] [SeparableSpace Z] where the paper says "separable Banach". Set limits are Kuratowski limits along filters (t↓0t \downarrow 0t↓0 is 𝓝[>] 0, and (t,w′)→(0+,w)(t,w') \to (0^+,w)(t,w′)→(0+,w) is the product filter). The contingent derivative is defined by (2.2) alone. M.4's printed sum formula equals it under M.1, and this is not assumed. "B-differentiable" is read as the limit (2.4). Products carry Lean's max norm. s1s_1s1​ is s 0, empirical means sum over Finset.range ν, and (2.5) is required for ν≥1\nu \ge 1ν≥1. F=Ef+NF = Ef + NF=Ef+N is empty off UUU. Convergence in distribution is Mathlib's TendstoInDistribution, with the limit on its own probability space. The law of w∗w^*w∗ is fixed through linear functionals: ⟨ℓ,w∗⟩∼N(0,Var⁡⟨ℓ,f(x∗,s1)⟩)\langle\ell, w^*\rangle \sim \mathcal N(0, \operatorname{Var}\langle\ell, f(x^*,s_1)\rangle)⟨ℓ,w∗⟩∼N(0,Var⟨ℓ,f(x∗,s1​)⟩). In Appendix A1–A3 the integrand is S → C(↥U, Rn m) with the Borel σ-algebra, and "Gaussian" is IsGaussian.

Explicit choices relative to the printed text:

  1. The paper states that an almost surely convergent sequence of solutions "converges to the point x∗x^*x∗" (Theorems 2.6 and 2.7). This is false when the true equation has a second solution: f(z,x)=x2−x−zf(z,x) = x^2 - x - zf(z,x)=x2−x−z, N≡{0}N \equiv \{0\}N≡{0}, z∗=x∗=0z^* = x^* = 0z∗=x∗=0 satisfies M.1–M.4 with J(0)={0,1}J(0) = \{0, 1\}J(0)={0,1}. The formalization assumes xν→x∗x^\nu \to x^*xν→x∗ almost surely instead.
  2. 0∈F(x∗)0 \in F(x^*)0∈F(x∗) (presupposed by DF−1(0∣x∗)DF^{-1}(0|x^*)DF−1(0∣x∗)) is explicit in Theorem 2.4 and the upper-Lipschitz display.
  3. The threshold for "all sufficiently small δ\deltaδ" in Theorem 2.4 is chosen with UUU and λ\lambdaλ, before the random elements.
  4. Proposition A1 and Corollary A2 carry P.1–P.4, as stated or inherited on the Appendix page, though their measurability conclusions use only P.1.
  5. In the limit theorems, the single-valued map DF−1(0∣x∗)DF^{-1}(0|x^*)DF−1(0∣x∗) is a function LLL whose values lie in the contingent derivative at every point.

The conclusion of the goal names its limit: the image of the stated Gaussian under a map LLL whose values lie in the contingent derivative of F−1F^{-1}F−1. A statement asserting only that ν(xν−x∗)\sqrt\nu(x^\nu - x^*)ν​(xν−x∗) converges in distribution to some limit, or replacing DF−1(0∣x∗)DF^{-1}(0|x^*)DF−1(0∣x∗) by a linear map, is a different and weaker theorem. A sorry-free check confirms that the goal's hypotheses can all be met (a degenerate instance with f(x,s)=xf(x,s) = xf(x,s)=x, N≡{0}N \equiv \{0\}N≡{0}).

A complete development needs Kuratowski set convergence and contingent derivatives (reusable across set-valued analysis), a central limit theorem in C(K)C(K)C(K) for Lipschitz-indexed processes (reusable for empirical-process theory), and a continuous-mapping argument for random closed sets. Contributions to any of these layers are welcome, as are proofs of the cited [12] statements.

Selected references

  • A. J. King and R. T. Rockafellar, Asymptotic theory for solutions in statistical estimation and stochastic programming, Mathematics of Operations Research 18(1) (1993). https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.18.1.148
  • A. J. King and R. T. Rockafellar, Sensitivity analysis for nonsmooth generalized equations, Mathematical Programming 55 (1992) 193–212. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01581199
  • A. J. King, Generalized delta theorems for multivalued mappings and measurable selections, Mathematics of Operations Research 14(4) (1989) 720–736. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.14.4.720
  • J. Dupačová and R. J.-B. Wets, Asymptotic behavior of statistical estimators and of optimal solutions of stochastic optimization problems, Annals of Statistics 16(4) (1988) 1517–1549. https://doi.org/10.1214/aos/1176351052
  • A. Shapiro, Asymptotic properties of statistical estimators in stochastic programming, Annals of Statistics 17(2) (1989) 841–858. https://doi.org/10.1214/aos/1176347146
  • P. J. Huber, The behavior of maximum likelihood estimates under nonstandard conditions, Proc. Fifth Berkeley Symp. Math. Statist. Probab. 1 (1967) 221–233. https://projecteuclid.org/euclid.bsmsp/1200512988
  • A. Araujo and E. Giné, The Central Limit Theorem for Real and Banach Valued Random Variables, Wiley, 1980.
10 thms1 active userReviewed
Control TheoryDynamical Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Dynamic Instabilities and Stabilization Methods in Distributed Real-Time Scheduling of Manufacturing Systems 1: Clearing Policies Are Unstable on a Re-Entrant Two-Machine Line, Even Without Set-UpsResearch Paper

Motivation

A flexible manufacturing system is a set of machines through which parts of several types travel along fixed routes; each machine serves several buffers and must pay a set-up time whenever it switches from one buffer to another. Real-time scheduling decides, as the system evolves, which buffer each machine works on. Perkins and Kumar (IEEE Trans. Automat. Control 34, 1989) introduced simple distributed policies for this problem, of which the most natural is the clearing policy: a machine keeps working on a buffer until it is empty, and only then switches. They proved that every clear-a-fraction policy, a subclass of clearing policies, keeps every buffer bounded on acyclic systems whenever each machine has spare capacity, and left open whether clear-a-fraction policies stabilize all systems in which material flows around cycles.

Kumar and Seidman (IEEE Trans. Automat. Control 35(3), 1990, doi:10.1109/9.50339) answered no. Their Example 1 is a single part type that visits two machines in the order 1, 2, 2, 1. Every machine has spare capacity, yet under the clearing policy the buffer levels grow without bound, and they do so even when all set-up times are zero, so the instability comes from machines starving each other rather than from time lost to set-ups. Until then, instability had been suspected to require positive set-up times. Shortly afterwards Lu and Kumar exhibited instability of a static buffer-priority rule in a re-entrant network (IEEE Trans. Automat. Control 36, 1991); together these examples started the study of stability of multiclass queueing networks.

Setting

A manufacturing system has part types ppp arriving at rates dp>0d_p > 0dp​>0. Parts of type ppp follow a route of length npn_pnp​: their iii-th operation is at machine μp,i\mu_{p,i}μp,i​, and they wait for it in buffer bp,ib_{p,i}bp,i​, where each part needs processing time τp,i>0\tau_{p,i} > 0τp,i​>0. Machine mmm serves the buffers Bm={b:μb=m}B_m = \{b : \mu_b = m\}Bm​={b:μb​=m}, and switching from bbb to b′b'b′ costs set-up time δb,b′≥0\delta_{b,b'} \ge 0δb,b′​≥0.

Flows are continuous (fluid). The level of buffer bbb at time t≥0t \ge 0t≥0 is xb(t)=xb(0)+ub(t)−yb(t)≥0x_b(t) = x_b(0) + u_b(t) - y_b(t) \ge 0xb​(t)=xb​(0)+ub​(t)−yb​(t)≥0, where yb(t)y_b(t)yb​(t) is its cumulative output and ub(t)u_b(t)ub​(t) its cumulative input: dptd_p tdp​t for the first buffer of a route, and the output of the preceding buffer otherwise. Each machine works in runs: run kkk is a set-up phase of length δβk−1,βk\delta_{\beta_{k-1},\beta_k}δβk−1​,βk​​ followed by a processing phase on buffer βk\beta_kβk​, during which the buffer is drained at rate 1/τb1/\tau_b1/τb​ while it is nonempty and passed through at its inflow rate when it is empty. The system is stable if sup⁡0≤t<∞xb(t)<∞\sup_{0 \le t < \infty} x_b(t) < \inftysup0≤t<∞​xb​(t)<∞ for every buffer.

A clearing policy (Definition 1) is one in which a machine processing bbb continues until the first time that bbb is empty and some other buffer of the same machine is nonempty, and then commences a set-up for one of the nonempty buffers.

Example 1. One part type arrives at rate d=1d = 1d=1 and visits machine 1, machine 2, machine 2 and machine 1; its buffers are 1,2,3,41, 2, 3, 41,2,3,4, so B1={1,4}B_1 = \{1, 4\}B1​={1,4} and B2={2,3}B_2 = \{2, 3\}B2​={2,3}. Processing times are τ1,…,τ4>0\tau_1, \dots, \tau_4 > 0τ1​,…,τ4​>0, and δk\delta_kδk​ is the time to set up to buffer kkk. The parameters satisfy the critical condition and the capacity condition

τ2+τ4>1,τ1+τ4<1,τ2+τ3<1.(3–5)\tau_2 + \tau_4 > 1, \qquad \tau_1 + \tau_4 < 1, \qquad \tau_2 + \tau_3 < 1. \tag{3–5}τ2​+τ4​>1,τ1​+τ4​<1,τ2​+τ3​<1.(3–5)

The initial state is x(0)=(ξ,0,0,0)x(0) = (\xi, 0, 0, 0)x(0)=(ξ,0,0,0), with machine 1 set up for buffer 4 and machine 2 set up for buffer 3. Write

λ=τ41−τ2>1,α=(τ4+1)(δ1+δ2)1−τ2+δ3(τ4+1)+δ4,β=τ4(δ1+δ2)1−τ2+τ4δ3+δ4.\lambda = \frac{\tau_4}{1-\tau_2} > 1, \quad \alpha = \frac{(\tau_4+1)(\delta_1+\delta_2)}{1-\tau_2} + \delta_3(\tau_4+1) + \delta_4, \quad \beta = \frac{\tau_4(\delta_1+\delta_2)}{1-\tau_2} + \tau_4\delta_3 + \delta_4.λ=1−τ2​τ4​​>1,α=1−τ2​(τ4​+1)(δ1​+δ2​)​+δ3​(τ4​+1)+δ4​,β=1−τ2​τ4​(δ1​+δ2​)​+τ4​δ3​+δ4​.

Formalization targets

Goal: Example 1, both cases

Assume (3)–(5).

  1. If δ1,…,δ4>0\delta_1, \dots, \delta_4 > 0δ1​,…,δ4​>0, there is ξ0\xi_0ξ0​ such that for every ξ≥ξ0\xi \ge \xi_0ξ≥ξ0​ (ξ>0\xi > 0ξ>0) a clearing trajectory from (ξ,0,0,0)(\xi, 0, 0, 0)(ξ,0,0,0) exists, and every such trajectory has
sup⁡0≤t<∞x1(t)=+∞.\sup_{0 \le t < \infty} x_1(t) = +\infty.0≤t<∞sup​x1​(t)=+∞.
  1. If δ1=⋯=δ4=0\delta_1 = \dots = \delta_4 = 0δ1​=⋯=δ4​=0, the same holds for every ξ>0\xi > 0ξ>0.

Milestone: the Case 1 cycle map

For ξ\xiξ large enough, every clearing trajectory from (ξ,0,0,0)(\xi, 0, 0, 0)(ξ,0,0,0) reaches, at T1=(λ+τ2/(1−τ2))ξ+αT_1 = (\lambda + \tau_2/(1-\tau_2))\xi + \alphaT1​=(λ+τ2​/(1−τ2​))ξ+α,

x(T1)=(λξ+β,0,0,0),x(T_1) = (\lambda\xi + \beta, 0, 0, 0),x(T1​)=(λξ+β,0,0,0),

with machines 1 and 2 again set up for buffers 4 and 3.

Milestone: the Case 2 magnification

With zero set-up times and any ξ>0\xi > 0ξ>0, every clearing trajectory reaches, at t5=(τ2+τ4)ξ/(1−τ2)t_5 = (\tau_2+\tau_4)\xi/(1-\tau_2)t5​=(τ2​+τ4​)ξ/(1−τ2​),

x(t5)=(λξ,0,0,0),x(t_5) = (\lambda\xi, 0, 0, 0),x(t5​)=(λξ,0,0,0),

with machines 1 and 2 again set up for buffers 4 and 3.

Significance

The example shows that the condition ρm<1\rho_m < 1ρm​<1 on every machine, which is necessary for stability and sufficient for the existence of some stabilizing policy, does not make natural distributed policies stable once material flows around a cycle. The throughput of the line falls to 1/(τ2+τ4)<11/(\tau_2+\tau_4) < 11/(τ2​+τ4​)<1 part per unit time although each machine could handle the demand. This motivates the paper's two positive results: sufficient conditions under which clear-a-fraction policies are stable (Theorem 1), and a supervisory mechanism that stabilizes any policy (Theorem 2), which are the subjects of the other missions of this series. The example is also an early instance of the phenomenon later studied as instability of multiclass fluid networks under work-conserving policies.

The paper's argument is a stage-by-stage computation of piecewise linear trajectories. No machine-checked version of it exists. A formal proof has to make precise what the paper leaves to the reader: that the clearing rule determines the trajectory, that the stage formulas are what that trajectory does, and that the cycle can be restarted. The formal model of runs, set-ups and the clearing rule built here is the same as in the other missions of the series.

Difficulty

The arithmetic of each cycle is routine once the trajectory is known. The difficulty is in the universal quantifier: the claim covers every clearing trajectory, and the clearing rule is defined implicitly, through "the first time thereafter" at which a buffer is empty and another one is nonempty. At several switching instants the buffer a machine switches to is empty and only starts to fill at that instant, and with zero set-up times a machine may begin a run at an instant where the switching condition already holds. Showing that each switch happens exactly when the paper says, and that the fluid levels then follow the printed formulas (including the reduced rate of a machine working on an empty buffer), is a uniqueness argument for a hybrid system, not a simulation. The existence half asks for the converse: an explicit trajectory, defined for all time, with infinitely many runs whose start times tend to infinity.

Formalization scope

  • Time is real (t≥0t \ge 0t≥0); flows are fluid; there are no transport delays or assembly.
  • The system is a general structure (part types Fin P, machines Fin M, buffers ⟨p, i⟩ with i : Fin (n p), paper index iii = Lean index i+1i+1i+1), instantiated as Example 1 with d=1d = 1d=1, route (1,2,2,1)(1,2,2,1)(1,2,2,1), and δb,b′=δb′\delta_{b,b'} = \delta_{b'}δb,b′​=δb′​ for b≠b′b \ne b'b=b′; staying on a buffer costs nothing.
  • A trajectory is a schedule of runs per machine (possibly finitely many, the last lasting forever), with only finitely many run starts in any bounded interval. Processing obeys a rate cap (yby_byb​ grows at most at rate 1/τb1/\tau_b1/τb​, and only while machine μb\mu_bμb​ is in a processing phase of bbb) and runs at full rate while the buffer is nonempty.
  • In Definition 1, a target buffer counts as "nonempty" when it is demanding: positive level, or inflow starting at that instant. The no-early-exit condition is imposed on the open processing interval. Under the literal reading (positive level) or a closed interval, the paper's own trajectories are not clearing, and the goal would hold vacuously; the existence clause in the goal rules out that trivialization.
  • "Set up for buffer bbb at time TTT" means the run in force on (sk,sk+1](s_k, s_{k+1}](sk​,sk+1​].
  • Unboundedness is stated for buffer 1: for every CCC there is t≥0t \ge 0t≥0 with x1(t)>Cx_1(t) > Cx1​(t)>C; "ξ\xiξ large enough" is ∃ξ0,∀ξ≥ξ0\exists \xi_0, \forall \xi \ge \xi_0∃ξ0​,∀ξ≥ξ0​.

Useful contributions include lemmas about fluid trajectories that do not depend on the example (continuity of levels, the pass-through rate on an empty buffer, restarting a trajectory at a run boundary), which also serve the other missions of the series.

Selected references

  • P. R. Kumar and T. I. Seidman, Dynamic instabilities and stabilization methods in distributed real-time scheduling of manufacturing systems, IEEE Trans. Automat. Control 35(3), 289–298, 1990. https://doi.org/10.1109/9.50339
  • J. R. Perkins and P. R. Kumar, Stable, distributed, real-time scheduling of flexible manufacturing/assembly/disassembly systems, IEEE Trans. Automat. Control 34, 139–148, 1989 (reference [18] of the paper).
  • S. H. Lu and P. R. Kumar, Distributed scheduling based on due dates and buffer priorities, IEEE Trans. Automat. Control 36, 1991.
7 thms1 active userReviewed
ProbabilityStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Stochastic Inequalities on Partially Ordered Spaces 1: Stochastically Ordered Initial Laws and Kernels Give Coupled Random Sequences with Xₙ ≤ Yₙ for All n Almost SurelyResearch Paper

Motivation

Comparison theorems for stochastic processes answer a practical question: if one system starts "lower" and moves "upward" less aggressively than another, does it stay below the other one for all time? Queueing, reliability and inventory models use such statements to order performance measures of two systems without computing either distribution. Results of this kind for real-valued Markov chains go back to Kalmykov (1962) and Daley (1968); O'Brien (1975) proved a comparison theorem for real sequences with general (non-Markov) dependence on the past.

Kamae, Krengel and O'Brien (1977) placed these results on a common foundation: an arbitrary partially ordered Polish space, where the state can be a vector, a path, a configuration or a measure. Their tool is a characterization of the stochastic order through monotone couplings, which goes back to Strassen (1965).

Timeline.

  • 1962, Kalmykov: comparison of real Markov chains with stochastically monotone kernels.
  • 1965, Strassen: existence of probability measures with given marginals; a coupling on a closed set K⊆E×EK \subseteq E \times EK⊆E×E exists iff the marginals satisfy the matching inequalities.
  • 1968, Daley: stochastically monotone Markov chains on R\mathbb RR.
  • 1975, O'Brien: comparison theorem for real random sequences with history-dependent kernels.
  • 1977, Kamae–Krengel–O'Brien: the order on a partially ordered Polish space, Theorem 1 (six characterizations), and the comparison theorem for sequences in products of such spaces (Theorem 2).

Setting

Let EEE be a complete separable metric space with a closed partial order ≤\le≤ (the set {(x,y):x≤y}\{(x,y) : x \le y\}{(x,y):x≤y} is closed in E×EE \times EE×E) and its Borel σ\sigmaσ-algebra. Write M(E)\mathcal M(E)M(E) for the probability measures on EEE. A set A⊆EA \subseteq EA⊆E is increasing if x∈Ax \in Ax∈A and x≤yx \le yx≤y imply y∈Ay \in Ay∈A; a function fff is increasing if x≤yx \le yx≤y implies f(x)≤f(y)f(x) \le f(y)f(x)≤f(y). For P1,P2∈M(E)P_1, P_2 \in \mathcal M(E)P1​,P2​∈M(E), P1P_1P1​ is stochastically smaller than P2P_2P2​, written P1≺P2P_1 \prec P_2P1​≺P2​, if

∫f dP1≤∫f dP2for every bounded measurable increasing f:E→R.\int f\,dP_1 \le \int f\,dP_2 \quad\text{for every bounded measurable increasing } f : E \to \mathbb R .∫fdP1​≤∫fdP2​for every bounded measurable increasing f:E→R.

A stochastic kernel kkk from E1E_1E1​ to E2E_2E2​ assigns to every x∈E1x \in E_1x∈E1​ a probability measure k(x,⋅)k(x,\cdot)k(x,⋅) on E2E_2E2​, measurably in xxx. For P1∈M(E1)P_1 \in \mathcal M(E_1)P1​∈M(E1​), P1∗kP_1 * kP1​∗k is the measure on E1×E2E_1 \times E_2E1​×E2​ with (P1∗k)(A1×A2)=∫A1k(x,A2) P1(dx)(P_1 * k)(A_1 \times A_2) = \int_{A_1} k(x, A_2)\,P_1(dx)(P1​∗k)(A1​×A2​)=∫A1​​k(x,A2​)P1​(dx), and P1kP_1^{k}P1k​ is its second marginal. A kernel kkk on E×EE \times EE×E is upward if k(x,⋅)k(x,\cdot)k(x,⋅) is concentrated on {y:y≥x}\{y : y \ge x\}{y:y≥x} for every xxx.

For partially ordered Polish spaces E1,E2,…E_1, E_2, \dotsE1​,E2​,…, the products En=E1×⋯×EnE^{n} = E_1 \times \cdots \times E_nEn=E1​×⋯×En​ and E∞=∏iEiE^\infty = \prod_i E_iE∞=∏i​Ei​ carry the product topology and the coordinatewise order, and are again partially ordered Polish spaces. Given P1∈M(E1)P_1 \in \mathcal M(E_1)P1​∈M(E1​) and kernels pnp_npn​ from En−1E^{n-1}En−1 to EnE_nEn​ (n≥2n \ge 2n≥2), the measure P1∗p2∗⋯∗pnP_1 * p_2 * \cdots * p_nP1​∗p2​∗⋯∗pn​ on EnE^{n}En is the law of (X1,…,Xn)(X_1, \dots, X_n)(X1​,…,Xn​) when X1∼P1X_1 \sim P_1X1​∼P1​ and XnX_nXn​ is drawn from pn(X1,…,Xn−1,⋅)p_n(X_1, \dots, X_{n-1}, \cdot)pn​(X1​,…,Xn−1​,⋅); its projective limit is the law of the whole sequence.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2 (the discrete-time comparison theorem)

Let P1,Q1∈M(E1)P_1, Q_1 \in \mathcal M(E_1)P1​,Q1​∈M(E1​) and let pn,qnp_n, q_npn​,qn​ be stochastic kernels from En−1E^{n-1}En−1 to EnE_nEn​, n≥2n \ge 2n≥2. If P1≺Q1P_1 \prec Q_1P1​≺Q1​ and

pn(xn−1,⋅)≺qn(yn−1,⋅)whenever xn−1≤yn−1,p_n(x^{n-1},\cdot) \prec q_n(y^{n-1},\cdot) \quad\text{whenever } x^{n-1} \le y^{n-1},pn​(xn−1,⋅)≺qn​(yn−1,⋅)whenever xn−1≤yn−1,

then there are random sequences (Xn)(X_n)(Xn​), (Yn)(Y_n)(Yn​) on one probability space, with initial laws P1P_1P1​, Q1Q_1Q1​ and conditional laws pnp_npn​, qnq_nqn​, such that

P(Xi≤Yi, i=1,2,… )=1.P(X_i \le Y_i,\ i = 1, 2, \dots) = 1 .P(Xi​≤Yi​, i=1,2,…)=1.

Milestones

  1. Theorem 1: for P1,P2∈M(E)P_1, P_2 \in \mathcal M(E)P1​,P2​∈M(E), P1≺P2P_1 \prec P_2P1​≺P2​ is equivalent to each of: a coupling supported on {x≤y}\{x \le y\}{x≤y}; a representation f(Z)∼P1f(Z) \sim P_1f(Z)∼P1​, g(Z)∼P2g(Z) \sim P_2g(Z)∼P2​ with f≤gf \le gf≤g and ZZZ real; random variables X1≤X2X_1 \le X_2X1​≤X2​ a.s. with laws P1,P2P_1, P_2P1​,P2​; P2=P1kP_2 = P_1^{k}P2​=P1k​ for an upward kernel kkk; and P1(B)≤P2(B)P_1(B) \le P_2(B)P1​(B)≤P2​(B) for every closed increasing BBB.
  2. Proposition 1: under the hypotheses of Theorem 2, P1∗p2∗⋯∗pn≺Q1∗q2∗⋯∗qnP_1 * p_2 * \cdots * p_n \prec Q_1 * q_2 * \cdots * q_nP1​∗p2​∗⋯∗pn​≺Q1​∗q2​∗⋯∗qn​ for every nnn.
  3. Proposition 2: on E∞E^\inftyE∞, if all finite-dimensional marginals satisfy P(i)≺Q(i)P^{(i)} \prec Q^{(i)}P(i)≺Q(i), then P≺QP \prec QP≺Q.
  4. Proposition 3: ≺\prec≺ is preserved under weak convergence.
  5. Proposition 4: P1≺P2≺⋯P_1 \prec P_2 \prec \cdotsP1​≺P2​≺⋯ iff there are random elements X1≤X2≤⋯X_1 \le X_2 \le \cdotsX1​≤X2​≤⋯ a.s. with Xi∼PiX_i \sim P_iXi​∼Pi​, iff there are ZZZ real and f1≤f2≤⋯f_1 \le f_2 \le \cdotsf1​≤f2​≤⋯ with fi(Z)∼Pif_i(Z) \sim P_ifi​(Z)∼Pi​.
  6. Corollary 1 (i)–(iii), consequences of Theorem 2 when E1=E2=⋯E_1 = E_2 = \cdotsE1​=E2​=⋯: for an increasing set AAA, P(Xn∈A)≤P(Yn∈A)P(X_n \in A) \le P(Y_n \in A)P(Xn​∈A)≤P(Yn​∈A); first entrance times into AAA satisfy P(Nx<n)≤P(Ny<n)P(N_x < n) \le P(N_y < n)P(Nx​<n)≤P(Ny​<n); and Ef(Xn)≤Ef(Yn)E f(X_n) \le E f(Y_n)Ef(Xn​)≤Ef(Yn​) for nondecreasing fff whenever the expectations exist.
  7. Theorem 3: in a partially ordered Polish space with a compatible vector structure, kernels ordered through the increments they produce yield processes (Sn)(S_n)(Sn​), (Tn)(T_n)(Tn​) with S1≤T1S_1 \le T_1S1​≤T1​ and Sn+1−Sn≤Tn+1−TnS_{n+1} - S_n \le T_{n+1} - T_nSn+1​−Sn​≤Tn+1​−Tn​ for all nnn, almost surely.

Significance

The result. Theorem 2 turns an inequality between one-step transition laws into a pathwise inequality between whole trajectories. Every functional that is increasing in the path, such as hitting times of increasing sets, maxima, occupation counts or cumulative costs, is then ordered between the two processes, as Corollary 1 illustrates. Because the state space is any partially ordered Polish space, the theorem covers vector-valued queue lengths, networks, and processes whose state is itself a sequence, not just real chains. Theorem 1 is the basic tool for working with the order on such spaces: it converts between integrals, couplings, kernels and closed increasing sets.

Formalizing it. All results are proved in the paper (1977); none is machine-checked. The platform has the special case of Theorem 1 (i) ⇔\Leftrightarrow⇔ (iv) for E=RnE = \mathbb R^nE=Rn as an open statement (PalmQueueing.Ordering.strassen_st); the general partially ordered Polish case, and the sequence comparison, are new. A formal development yields a reusable library for the stochastic order on general ordered spaces and its interaction with Mathlib's Ionescu-Tulcea construction of process laws (Kernel.trajMeasure).

Difficulty

The obvious argument for Theorem 2 couples the processes step by step: couple X1≤Y1X_1 \le Y_1X1​≤Y1​, then, given the two histories, couple X2≤Y2X_2 \le Y_2X2​≤Y2​, and so on. Each step needs a monotone coupling of pn(xn−1,⋅)p_n(x^{n-1},\cdot)pn​(xn−1,⋅) and qn(yn−1,⋅)q_n(y^{n-1},\cdot)qn​(yn−1,⋅) chosen measurably in the pair of histories; the existence of one coupling for each fixed pair (Theorem 1) does not by itself give a kernel.

Theorem 1's central implication, from the integral inequality to a coupling supported on the closed set {x≤y}\{x \le y\}{x≤y}, is Strassen's theorem. On R\mathbb RR it follows from quantile functions; on a general ordered space there is no such formula. Passing from finite horizons to the infinite sequence is a further step, since an ordering of every finite-dimensional marginal must be turned into an ordering of the infinite-dimensional laws.

Formalization scope

  • A partially ordered Polish space is [TopologicalSpace E] [PolishSpace E] [MeasurableSpace E] [BorelSpace E] [PartialOrder E] [OrderClosedTopology E]. This is the paper's standing assumption (Sec. 1, p. 899) and is carried by every theorem, also where a statement says only "Polish space". All sets and functions the paper quantifies over are measurable, also by the standing assumption.
  • StochLE P₁ P₂ is defined through bounded measurable monotone functions, exactly as on p. 899. It is not defined through increasing sets, closed increasing sets or couplings, so none of the milestones holds by definition.
  • Sequences are 0-based: the paper's EiE_iEi​, XiX_iXi​ are Lean's E (i - 1), X (i - 1), and the paper's kernel pnp_npn​ (n≥2n \ge 2n≥2) is p (n - 2) : Kernel (Π i : Iic (n - 2), E i) (E (n - 1)), the signature of Mathlib's Ionescu-Tulcea API.
  • "Random sequences with initial law P1P_1P1​ and conditional laws pnp_npn​" is encoded through their joint law, which these data determine: the law of (Xn)(X_n)(Xn​) is Kernel.trajMeasure P₁ p. Corollary 1 is stated about these laws directly. The goal therefore cannot be met by coupling only one-dimensional marginals or finite prefixes; it asserts the joint laws of the full sequences and one almost-sure event for all indices.
  • Hypothesis (4) is required pointwise for all ordered pairs of histories; no stochastic monotonicity of the kernels is assumed.
  • Corollary 1 (iii) takes expectations in the extended sense, Ef=Ef+−Ef−E f = E f^+ - E f^-Ef=Ef+−Ef− in EReal, and "the expectation exists" means the two parts are not both infinite; expectations equal to ±∞\pm\infty±∞ are covered.
  • Theorem 1 (iii) and Proposition 4 (iii) leave the law of the real variable ZZZ free, as the paper does.
  • Theorem 3 (p. 904) prints the conditional increment law of TTT as qn+1(T1,…,Tn;A+Sn)q_{n+1}(T_1, \dots, T_n; A + S_n)qn+1​(T1​,…,Tn​;A+Sn​); this is a misprint for A+TnA + T_nA+Tn​, and the Lean states the corrected form. Its compatible vector structure is [AddCommGroup E] [Module ℝ E] [ContinuousAdd E] [ContinuousSMul ℝ E] plus the hypothesis that translates of increasing sets are increasing.
  • Not included: Sections 4–5 (continuous time, which needs the Skorohod space).

Welcome contributions: proofs of the milestones, in particular Strassen's coupling theorem on partially ordered Polish spaces, a measurable-selection lemma for monotone couplings, and general lemmas relating StochLE to increasing sets.

The source is the published version (The Annals of Probability), and printed page = PDF page + 898 throughout.

Selected references

  • T. Kamae, U. Krengel, G. L. O'Brien, Stochastic Inequalities on Partially Ordered Spaces, The Annals of Probability 5(6), 1977, 899–912. https://doi.org/10.1214/aop/1176995659
  • V. Strassen, The existence of probability measures with given marginals, The Annals of Mathematical Statistics 36(2), 1965, 423–439. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoms/1177700153
  • G. L. O'Brien, The comparison method for stochastic processes, The Annals of Probability 3, 1975, 80–88. https://projecteuclid.org/journals/annals-of-probability/volume-3/issue-1
  • D. J. Daley, Stochastically monotone Markov chains, Zeitschrift für Wahrscheinlichkeitstheorie und verwandte Gebiete 10, 1968, 307–317 (as cited in the paper).
  • G. I. Kalmykov, On the partial ordering of one-dimensional Markov processes, Theory of Probability and its Applications 7, 1962, 456–459 (as cited in the paper).
13 thms1 active userReviewed
Graph TheoryProbabilityStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Loss Networks 3: If E e^{λX} < ∞ and 2E(X − C)⁺ < E(C − X)⁺, i.i.d. Loads on the Complete Graph Fit on Direct and Two-Edge Routes with Probability → 1Research Paper

Motivation

Telephone and data networks are often fully connected at the core: every pair of switching centres has a direct trunk group, and a call that finds its direct trunk full may be alternatively routed over a two-link path through a third, tandem centre. Whether such a network can absorb fluctuations of demand without losing traffic depends on how the spare capacity of lightly loaded links can be borrowed by heavily loaded ones. F. P. Kelly's survey Loss networks (Ann. Appl. Probab., 1991, doi:10.1214/aoap/1177005872) studies this question in §4.6, "Results respecting graph structure", by looking at a static snapshot of the network: random loads on the edges of a complete graph, and the question whether they can all be carried at once.

Timeline:

  • Hajek (1986, personal communication cited as [21] in the survey) considered edges coloured independently red (a pair that needs twice an edge's capacity) or white (an idle edge), and proved that for red probability p<1/3p<1/3p<1/3 all red pairs can be served over white two-edge paths with probability tending to one (Theorem 4.40, p. 357).
  • Hajek (1987, [22]) showed the same threshold for routing each red pair on a single two-edge path (Theorem 4.43, quoted, p. 358).
  • Kelly (1991, Theorem 4.45, p. 358) extended Theorem 4.40 from two-valued loads to general i.i.d. loads with an exponential moment, under the condition 2 E(X−C)+<E(C−X)+2\,\mathbb E(X-C)^+<\mathbb E(C-X)^+2E(X−C)+<E(C−X)+. The survey gives the proof in full on p. 359.

Setting

Let K≥1K\ge 1K≥1 and consider the complete graph on the nodes {0,…,K−1}\{0,\dots,K-1\}{0,…,K−1}: every unordered pair e={a,b}e=\{a,b\}e={a,b} of distinct nodes is an edge, and there are 12K(K−1)\tfrac12K(K-1)21​K(K−1) edges. Every edge has capacity CCC.

An offered load xe≥0x_e\ge 0xe​≥0 is attached to every edge eee. The load of e={a,b}e=\{a,b\}e={a,b} may be carried on its direct edge, or on a two-edge route a−k−ba-k-ba−k−b through a tandem node k∉ek\notin ek∈/e; such a route uses the two edges {a,k}\{a,k\}{a,k} and {b,k}\{b,k\}{b,k}. Loads are divisible. The loads are routable with capacity CCC if there are flows fe,k≥0f_{e,k}\ge 0fe,k​≥0 (zero when k∈ek\in ek∈e) with ∑kfe,k≤xe\sum_k f_{e,k}\le x_e∑k​fe,k​≤xe​ such that on every edge ggg

(xg−∑kfg,k)+∑(e,k): g on the route of e via kfe,k≤C,\Big(x_g-\sum_k f_{g,k}\Big)+\sum_{(e,k):\ g \text{ on the route of } e \text{ via } k} f_{e,k}\le C,(xg​−k∑​fg,k​)+(e,k): g on the route of e via k∑​fe,k​≤C,

i.e. the directly carried part of ggg's own load plus all two-edge traffic passing through ggg is at most CCC.

The loads are random: XXX is a nonnegative real random variable with law μ\muμ, and the loads (xe)(x_e)(xe​) are independent, each distributed as XXX. Let

P(K)=P{the loads on the complete graph on K nodes are routable}.P(K)=\mathbb P\{\text{the loads on the complete graph on } K \text{ nodes are routable}\}.P(K)=P{the loads on the complete graph on K nodes are routable}.

Write E(X−C)+\mathbb E(X-C)^+E(X−C)+ for the mean excess of a load over the capacity and E(C−X)+\mathbb E(C-X)^+E(C−X)+ for the mean spare capacity.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 4.45

If E eλX<∞\mathbb E\,e^{\lambda X}<\inftyEeλX<∞ for some λ>0\lambda>0λ>0 and

2 E(X−C)+<E(C−X)+(4.46)2\,\mathbb E(X-C)^+<\mathbb E(C-X)^+ \tag{4.46}2E(X−C)+<E(C−X)+(4.46)

then

P(K)→1(K→∞).P(K)\to 1 \qquad (K\to\infty).P(K)→1(K→∞).

Milestones (in the order of the proof on pp. 358–359)

With m=E(C−X)+m=\mathbb E(C-X)^+m=E(C−X)+ and 0<ε<m20<\varepsilon<m^20<ε<m2:

  1. In each triangle the cyclic reservations (xe−C)+(C−xak)+(C−xbk)+/((K−2)(m2−ε))(x_e-C)^+(C-x_{ak})^+(C-x_{bk})^+/((K-2)(m^2-\varepsilon))(xe​−C)+(C−xak​)+(C−xbk​)+/((K−2)(m2−ε)) are positive at most once, and only for an overloaded edge routed through two underloaded ones.
  2. If every overloaded edge's reservations cover its excess and no underloaded edge has more reserved through it than it has spare, the loads are routable.
  3. E Y=m2/(m2−ε)>1\mathbb E\,Y=m^2/(m^2-\varepsilon)>1EY=m2/(m2−ε)>1 for Y=(C−X2)+(C−X3)+/(m2−ε)Y=(C-X_2)^+(C-X_3)^+/(m^2-\varepsilon)Y=(C−X2​)+(C−X3​)+/(m2−ε).
  4. E Z=2 E(X−C)+ m/(m2−ε)<1\mathbb E\,Z=2\,\mathbb E(X-C)^+\,m/(m^2-\varepsilon)<1EZ=2E(X−C)+m/(m2−ε)<1 for small ε\varepsilonε, for Z=((X1−C)+(C−X2)++(X2−C)+(C−X1)+)/(m2−ε)Z=\big((X_1-C)^+(C-X_2)^++(X_2-C)^+(C-X_1)^+\big)/(m^2-\varepsilon)Z=((X1​−C)+(C−X2​)++(X2​−C)+(C−X1​)+)/(m2−ε).
  5. (4.48): P{∑i≤nn−1Yi<1}≤e−nI1\mathbb P\{\sum_{i\le n} n^{-1}Y_i<1\}\le e^{-nI_1}P{∑i≤n​n−1Yi​<1}≤e−nI1​ for some I1>0I_1>0I1​>0 and all n≥1n\ge 1n≥1.
  6. (4.49): P{∑i≤nn−1Zi>1}≤e−nI2\mathbb P\{\sum_{i\le n} n^{-1}Z_i>1\}\le e^{-nI_2}P{∑i≤n​n−1Zi​>1}≤e−nI2​ for some I2>0I_2>0I2​>0 and all n≥1n\ge 1n≥1, when XXX has an exponential moment.
  7. 1−P(K)≤12K(K−1) (P1(K−2)+P2(K−2))1-P(K)\le\tfrac12K(K-1)\,(P_1(K-2)+P_2(K-2))1−P(K)≤21​K(K−1)(P1​(K−2)+P2​(K−2)).

Significance

The result. Theorem 4.45 says that in a large fully connected network, a load distribution whose mean overload is less than half its mean spare capacity can be served, with probability tending to one, using only direct and two-link routes. The factor 222 reflects that each unit of overflow occupies two edges. The condition is explicit and depends on the load law only through two expectations, which makes it a design rule: capacity CCC suffices for large networks as soon as (4.46) holds. Comment 4.47 (p. 358) observes that the two-valued law P{X=2}=p\mathbb P\{X=2\}=pP{X=2}=p, P{X=0}=1−p\mathbb P\{X=0\}=1-pP{X=0}=1−p with C=1C=1C=1 turns (4.46) into Hajek's threshold p<1/3p<1/3p<1/3.

Formalizing it. The theorem is proved, in full, on one page; nothing here is open. The mission produces a machine-checked version of that proof: a precise routing event on the complete graph, the deterministic reservation argument, two Cramér–Chernoff tail bounds with rates uniform in the network size, and the union bound over edges. To our knowledge none of these steps is formalized anywhere, and no routing-feasibility event on a complete graph exists in Mathlib or on the platform.

Difficulty

The obvious approach is to fix an overloaded edge and argue that, among its K−2K-2K−2 two-edge routes, enough pass through two underloaded edges. That count is binomial and concentrates, but it does not prove the theorem: the same underloaded edge sits on two-edge routes of many overloaded pairs, so the reservations of different pairs compete for its spare capacity, and the routing decisions of different pairs are dependent. Any argument has to control, simultaneously at every edge, both the flow an overloaded edge can shed and the flow an underloaded edge is asked to absorb, with exponential rates uniform in KKK so that a union bound over 12K(K−1)\tfrac12K(K-1)21​K(K−1) edges survives; this is the central difficulty. On the upper side the variables are unbounded, so the exponential moment of XXX has to be carried over to the reserved flows.

Formalization scope

The Lean development lives in the namespace KellyLossNetworks.Routing.

  • Edges are {e : Sym2 (Fin K) // ¬ e.IsDiag}; loads are functions Edge K → ℝ.
  • The routing event Feasible C x lets each pair split its load arbitrarily over its direct edge and all its two-edge routes, charges a two-edge flow to both edges of its route, requires the flow sent away from a pair not to exceed its load, and imposes the capacity constraint on every edge, including overloaded ones. Flows are real (divisible loads); integer routing is a different problem.
  • "Independent and identically distributed" is the product measure Measure.pi (fun _ : Edge K => μ), with μ a probability measure on ℝ and X ≥ 0 almost surely. P(K)P(K)P(K) is the measure of the routing event; no measurability of that event is presupposed.
  • Expectations are Bochner integrals. The exponential moment is integrability of t↦eθtt\mapsto e^{\theta t}t↦eθt for some θ>0\theta>0θ>0; it implies that (X−C)+(X-C)^+(X−C)+ is integrable, so (4.46) compares genuine expectations.
  • The limit is along K∈NK\in\mathbb NK∈N with no lower bound on KKK; for K≤2K\le 2K≤2 there are no two-edge routes, which does not affect the limit.
  • The rates I1,I2I_1,I_2I1​,I2​ in (4.48) and (4.49) are quantified before nnn and may not depend on it.

A trivializing formalization is ruled out: an event that allows only direct routing, ignores the capacity of the edges a detour passes through, or lets a pair send away more than its load would make the statement false or empty, and the routing event here does none of these.

A complete development needs Fubini on product measures, the Cramér–Chernoff method for averages of i.i.d. variables (both tails, with the lower tail for a bounded nonnegative variable and the upper tail under an exponential moment), measure-preserving projections of Measure.pi, and combinatorics of the triangles through an edge of the complete graph. The Cramér–Chernoff bounds with rates uniform in nnn are reusable well beyond this mission. Contributions to any milestone are welcome; the deterministic milestones 1–2 and the expectation computations 3–4 are independent of the tail bounds and of each other.

Selected references

  • F. P. Kelly, Loss networks, Annals of Applied Probability 1(3):319–378, 1991. doi:10.1214/aoap/1177005872
  • B. Hajek, Average case analysis of greedy algorithms for Kelly's triangle problem and the independent set problem, 26th IEEE Conference on Decision and Control, 1987 (reference [22] of the survey; the source of Theorem 4.43).
  • H. Chernoff, A measure of asymptotic efficiency for tests of a hypothesis based on the sum of observations, Annals of Mathematical Statistics 23(4):493–507, 1952. doi:10.1214/aoms/1177729330
9 thms1 active userReviewed
ProbabilityStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Shock Models and Wear Processes III: The First Passage Time of a Nondecreasing Markov Wear Process Above a Fixed Level Has an IHRA DistributionResearch Paper

Motivation

Reliability theory classifies life distributions by how they age. A device whose failure rate tends to increase over time is "wearing out", and the class of distributions with increasing hazard rate average (IHRA) is the one that is closed under forming coherent systems of independent components (Birnbaum, Esary and Marshall, 1966). This makes IHRA the natural ageing class for systems. It also raises a question: which physical failure mechanisms produce IHRA lives?

Esary, Marshall and Proschan's paper Shock Models and Wear Processes (Ann. Probability 1, 1973) answers this for two kinds of mechanism. In the first, damage arrives in discrete amounts at the epochs of a Poisson process of shocks. In the second, damage accumulates continuously. In both, the device fails when the accumulated damage first exceeds a fixed capacity. This mission covers the second kind: a wear process {Z(t),t≥0}\{Z(t), t \ge 0\}{Z(t),t≥0} and its first passage time above a level. The paper shows that the first passage time is IHRA under three qualitative conditions: wear starts at zero and only grows, the process is Markov, and accumulated wear and age make further wear more likely. Nothing else is assumed about the law of the wear.

A short timeline. Birnbaum, Esary and Marshall (1966) introduced the IHRA class and proved it is closed under coherent systems. Morey (1965) studied first passage times of wear processes under an extra monotonicity assumption. Esary, Marshall and Proschan (1973), §4, proved the IHRA property first for Poisson shocks with i.i.d. damages (Corollary 4.2, (4.7)), then for dependent damages (Lemma 4.1b, (4.7b)), and finally for continuous wear (Theorem 4.10).

Setting

Let (Ω,F,P)(\Omega, \mathcal F, P)(Ω,F,P) be a probability space. "Decreasing" means non-increasing throughout.

A survival function Fˉ\bar FFˉ is IHRA if t↦[Fˉ(t)]1/tt \mapsto [\bar F(t)]^{1/t}t↦[Fˉ(t)]1/t is decreasing on t>0t > 0t>0 (p. 631). For an exponential life, [Fˉ(t)]1/t[\bar F(t)]^{1/t}[Fˉ(t)]1/t is constant. IHRA says the average failure rate over [0,t][0, t][0,t] never decreases.

Dependent damages. Let X1,X2,…X_1, X_2, \dotsX1​,X2​,… be nonnegative random variables, the damages caused by successive shocks, and let Z0=0Z_0 = 0Z0​=0 and Zk=X1+⋯+XkZ_k = X_1 + \dots + X_kZk​=X1​+⋯+Xk​. The paper's conditions (p. 636) are:

  • (4.3) the conditional law of XkX_kXk​ given X1,…,Xk−1X_1, \dots, X_{k-1}X1​,…,Xk−1​ depends only on Zk−1Z_{k-1}Zk−1​;
  • (4.4) P{Xk≤u∣Zk−1=z}P\{X_k \le u \mid Z_{k-1} = z\}P{Xk​≤u∣Zk−1​=z} is decreasing in z≥0z \ge 0z≥0 (accumulated damage lowers resistance);
  • (4.5) P{Xk≤u∣Zk−1=z}≥P{Xk+1≤u∣Zk=z}P\{X_k \le u \mid Z_{k-1} = z\} \ge P\{X_{k+1} \le u \mid Z_k = z\}P{Xk​≤u∣Zk−1​=z}≥P{Xk+1​≤u∣Zk​=z} for z≥0z \ge 0z≥0 (later shocks are more severe).

Wear process. Z(t)Z(t)Z(t) is the wear accumulated in [0,t][0, t][0,t]. The conditions (pp. 640–641) are:

  • (4.8) Z(0)=0Z(0) = 0Z(0)=0 and Z(t+Δ)−Z(t)≥0Z(t + \Delta) - Z(t) \ge 0Z(t+Δ)−Z(t)≥0 for all t,Δ≥0t, \Delta \ge 0t,Δ≥0, with probability one;
  • (4.9) {Z(t),t≥0}\{Z(t), t \ge 0\}{Z(t),t≥0} is a Markov process;
  • (4.10) P{Z(t+Δ)−Z(t)≤u∣Z(t)=z}P\{Z(t + \Delta) - Z(t) \le u \mid Z(t) = z\}P{Z(t+Δ)−Z(t)≤u∣Z(t)=z} is decreasing in both zzz and ttt in the region t≥0t \ge 0t≥0, z≥0z \ge 0z≥0, Δ≥0\Delta \ge 0Δ≥0.

The first passage time above a level xxx is Tx=inf⁡{t:Z(t)>x}T_x = \inf\{t : Z(t) > x\}Tx​=inf{t:Z(t)>x}. Its survival function is Hˉx(t)=P{Tx>t}\bar H_x(t) = P\{T_x > t\}Hˉx​(t)=P{Tx​>t}, and Ft(x)=P{Z(t)≤x}F_t(x) = P\{Z(t) \le x\}Ft​(x)=P{Z(t)≤x} is the distribution function of the wear at time ttt.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 4.10 (p. 641)

If {Z(t),t≥0}\{Z(t), t \ge 0\}{Z(t),t≥0} satisfies (4.8), (4.9) and (4.10), then for every level xxx

t⟼[Hˉx(t)]1/t is decreasing on t>0,t \longmapsto \big[\bar H_x(t)\big]^{1/t} \text{ is decreasing on } t > 0,t⟼[Hˉx​(t)]1/t is decreasing on t>0,

that is, TxT_xTx​ has an IHRA distribution.

Milestones

  1. Lemma 4.1b (p. 637): under (4.3)–(4.5), [P{X1+⋯+Xk≤x}]1/k[P\{X_1 + \dots + X_k \le x\}]^{1/k}[P{X1​+⋯+Xk​≤x}]1/k is decreasing in k=1,2,…k = 1, 2, \dotsk=1,2,….
  2. Proof of Theorem 4.10, first claim (a): for Δ>0\Delta > 0Δ>0, the grid increments Xi=Z(iΔ)−Z((i−1)Δ)X_i = Z(i\Delta) - Z((i-1)\Delta)Xi​=Z(iΔ)−Z((i−1)Δ) satisfy (4.3)–(4.5).
  3. Proof of Theorem 4.10, first claim (b): [FkΔ(x)]1/(kΔ)[F_{k\Delta}(x)]^{1/(k\Delta)}[FkΔ​(x)]1/(kΔ) is decreasing in k=1,2,…k = 1, 2, \dotsk=1,2,….
  4. Proof of Theorem 4.10, second claim: [Fs(x)]1/s≥[Ft(x)]1/t[F_s(x)]^{1/s} \ge [F_t(x)]^{1/t}[Fs​(x)]1/s≥[Ft​(x)]1/t whenever 0<s≤t0 < s \le t0<s≤t.
  5. Proof of Theorem 4.10, third claim: Hˉx(t)=lim⁡ε↓0Ft+ε(x)\bar H_x(t) = \lim_{\varepsilon \downarrow 0} F_{t+\varepsilon}(x)Hˉx​(t)=limε↓0​Ft+ε​(x), under (4.8) alone.

An optional extra item states Corollary 4.2 (4.7b): Poisson shocks of rate λ>0\lambda > 0λ>0 with damages satisfying (4.3)–(4.5) give an IHRA life Hˉ(t)=∑ke−λt(λt)k/k!⋅P{Zk≤x}\bar H(t) = \sum_k e^{-\lambda t} (\lambda t)^k / k! \cdot P\{Z_k \le x\}Hˉ(t)=∑k​e−λt(λt)k/k!⋅P{Zk​≤x}.

Significance

The result. Theorem 4.10 derives an ageing property of a failure time from qualitative properties of the damage process alone: no distributional form, no stationarity and no independence of increments is assumed. Together with the closure of IHRA under coherent systems, this lets a reliability engineer conclude that a system built from components failing by wear has an IHRA life. Examples include processes with nonnegative stationary independent increments started at the origin, such as compound Poisson processes and infinitesimal renewal processes (p. 641). Lemma 4.1b is the discrete analogue: a sequence of probabilities Pˉk\bar P_kPˉk​ with Pˉk1/k\bar P_k^{1/k}Pˉk1/k​ decreasing is what Theorem 3.1 (3.4) needs to give an IHRA life under Poisson shocks.

Formalizing it. The results are proved in the paper. As far as we know none of them has been machine-checked. The formalization needs, and would make reusable, a statement of the Markov property for a continuous-time real process in terms of Mathlib's conditional expectation, versions of conditional distributions with monotonicity constraints, and the passage from a discrete-time grid to continuous time for first passage times. Each of these is a step a probabilist writes in one line and a proof assistant does not.

Difficulty

The paper's proof is short, but every sentence hides a measure-theoretic step. The first claim, that the grid increments satisfy (4.3)–(4.5), requires turning the Markov property and the monotonicity of the increment law into conditional laws of Xk+1X_{k+1}Xk+1​ given (X1,…,Xk)(X_1, \dots, X_k)(X1​,…,Xk​). Those conditional laws are defined only almost everywhere, and the monotonicity must be preserved along the way. Lemma 4.1b itself is an induction that integrates the monotonicity conditions against the law of ZkZ_kZk​. The extension from rational to arbitrary ratios s/ts/ts/t uses the monotonicity of paths. The identification of Hˉx(t)\bar H_x(t)Hˉx​(t) as a right limit of Ft+ε(x)F_{t+\varepsilon}(x)Ft+ε​(x) needs the pathwise reading of (4.8). The natural first idea, approximating ZZZ by a compound Poisson process, would add hypotheses the theorem does not have.

Formalization scope

All objects sit in the namespace ShockWear.WearProcess, in one definition file. The committed conventions:

  • Probability space. A measure pr with IsProbabilityMeasure. Time is R≥0\mathbb R_{\ge 0}R≥0​; Z:R≥0→Ω→RZ : \mathbb R_{\ge0} \to \Omega \to \mathbb RZ:R≥0​→Ω→R with every Z(t)Z(t)Z(t) measurable.
  • (4.8) is read pathwise. Almost every path has Z(0)=0Z(0) = 0Z(0)=0 and is nondecreasing. The paper's "for all t,Δ≥0t, \Delta \ge 0t,Δ≥0 with probability one" is ambiguous in quantifier order; this reading is the one used by the proof's equivalence "Tx>tT_x > tTx​>t iff Z(t+ε)≤xZ(t+\varepsilon) \le xZ(t+ε)≤x for some ε>0\varepsilon > 0ε>0".
  • (4.9) is the Markov property for the natural filtration σ(Z(r),r≤s)\sigma(Z(r), r \le s)σ(Z(r),r≤s): P(Z(t)∈B∣Fs)=P(Z(t)∈B∣Z(s))P(Z(t) \in B \mid \mathcal F_s) = P(Z(t) \in B \mid Z(s))P(Z(t)∈B∣Fs​)=P(Z(t)∈B∣Z(s)) a.s. for s≤ts \le ts≤t and Borel BBB.
  • Conditional probabilities are explicit versions. P{Xk+1≤u∣Zk=z}P\{X_{k+1} \le u \mid Z_k = z\}P{Xk+1​≤u∣Zk​=z} and P{Z(t+Δ)−Z(t)≤u∣Z(t)=z}P\{Z(t+\Delta) - Z(t) \le u \mid Z(t) = z\}P{Z(t+Δ)−Z(t)≤u∣Z(t)=z} are the values on (−∞,u](-\infty, u](−∞,u] of Markov kernels κ\kappaκ that agree almost everywhere with Mathlib's condDistrib. The monotonicity conditions (4.4), (4.5), (4.10) are imposed on these versions, on the paper's regions z≥0z \ge 0z≥0, t≥0t \ge 0t≥0. "Is decreasing in zzz" is read as "has a version decreasing in zzz".
  • Nonnegativity of damages is almost sure.
  • Index base. Lean's X i is the paper's Xi+1X_{i+1}Xi+1​, and the kernel κ k describes Xk+1X_{k+1}Xk+1​ given ZkZ_kZk​.
  • First passage time TxT_xTx​ takes values in [0,∞][0, \infty][0,∞] and may be infinite with positive probability; it is not assumed finite. Hˉx(t)=1\bar H_x(t) = 1Hˉx​(t)=1 for t<0t < 0t<0. The level xxx ranges over all reals.
  • Powers [ ⋅ ]1/t[\,\cdot\,]^{1/t}[⋅]1/t, [ ⋅ ]1/k[\,\cdot\,]^{1/k}[⋅]1/k, [ ⋅ ]1/(kΔ)[\,\cdot\,]^{1/(k\Delta)}[⋅]1/(kΔ) are real powers with real exponents.

Trivializing formalizations are ruled out: (4.9) and (4.10) are not replaced by independence or stationarity of increments, nor by a compound Poisson model. Those are examples (p. 641), not hypotheses. Monotonicity is never imposed on Mathlib's condDistrib itself, whose values off the support of Z(t)Z(t)Z(t) are unconstrained. A sorry-free local check confirms the hypotheses are satisfiable: the deterministic process Z(t)=tZ(t) = tZ(t)=t satisfies (4.8)–(4.10), and constant damages satisfy (4.3)–(4.5).

Contributions are welcome on any milestone. The reduction (milestone 2) and the induction of Lemma 4.1b are the substantial parts. Lemmas about versions of conditional distributions under Markov processes would be reusable well beyond this mission.

Selected references

  • J. D. Esary, A. W. Marshall and F. Proschan, Shock Models and Wear Processes, Ann. Probability 1(4) (1973) 627–649. https://doi.org/10.1214/aop/1176996891
  • Z. W. Birnbaum, J. D. Esary and A. W. Marshall, A Stochastic Characterization of Wear-out for Components and Systems, Ann. Math. Statist. 37 (1966) 816–825. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoms/1177699362
  • R. C. Morey, Stochastic Wear Processes, Technical Report ORC 65-16, Operations Research Center, University of California, Berkeley, 1965 (cited on p. 640 of Esary, Marshall and Proschan).
  • R. E. Barlow and F. Proschan, Statistical Theory of Reliability and Life Testing, Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1975.
7 thms1 active userReviewed
ProbabilityStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

The Relation between Customer and Time Averages in Queues: H = λG on Every Sample Path When 0 < λ < ∞, G < ∞ and Each f_n Vanishes Outside [t_n, t_n + s_n] with s_n/n → 0Research Paper

Motivation

Little's law L=λWL = \lambda WL=λW says that the long-run average number of customers in a system equals the arrival rate times the average time a customer spends there. It is one of the most used identities in queueing theory, and it holds on individual sample paths under weak conditions (Little 1961; Stidham 1974). Many quantities of interest are not head counts, however: the work in the system, the cost accumulated by customers in progress, the number of tokens a customer holds in some state. For these a more general relation is needed, between a time average HHH and a customer average GGG, of the form H=λGH = \lambda GH=λG.

Heyman and Stidham (Oper. Res. 28 (1980)) prove such a relation on each sample path, for an arbitrary real-valued function attached to each customer, under a support condition that is much weaker than the continuous-sojourn assumption of the L=λWL = \lambda WL=λW theorem. They then show by a counterexample that the support condition cannot simply be dropped, even when every customer function is an indicator.

Timeline.

  • 1961: Little proves L=λWL = \lambda WL=λW under stationarity assumptions (Little 1961).
  • 1971: Brumelle proves H=λGH = \lambda GH=λG under conditions (v.a), (v.b) on the tails of the fnf_nfn​ (J. Appl. Prob. 8, 508–520).
  • 1972: Stidham gives a new proof of L=λWL = \lambda WL=λW, including the lemma relating N(t)/tN(t)/tN(t)/t and tn/nt_n/ntn​/n (Stidham 1972).
  • 1974: Stidham proves L=λWL = \lambda WL=λW on each sample path, assuming each sojourn is one uninterrupted interval (Stidham 1974).
  • 1980: Heyman and Stidham prove H=λGH = \lambda GH=λG on every sample path under the support condition below, and give the counterexample. The paper notes that its Theorem 1 is weaker than the sample-path version of Brumelle's theorem, with hypotheses stated directly on the sample path.

Setting

Fix one sample path. Customers n=1,2,…n = 1, 2, \ldotsn=1,2,… arrive at epochs 0≤t1≤t2≤⋯0 \le t_1 \le t_2 \le \cdots0≤t1​≤t2​≤⋯; ties are allowed. The arrival count N(t)N(t)N(t) is the number of nnn with tn≤tt_n \le ttn​≤t, and the arrival rate is λ=lim⁡t→∞N(t)/t\lambda = \lim_{t\to\infty} N(t)/tλ=limt→∞​N(t)/t when the limit exists.

Customer nnn carries a real-valued function fnf_nfn​ on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞). Its total is gn=∫0∞fn(t) dtg_n = \int_0^\infty f_n(t)\,dtgn​=∫0∞​fn​(t)dt, and the rate is h(t)=∑n=1∞fn(t)h(t) = \sum_{n=1}^\infty f_n(t)h(t)=∑n=1∞​fn​(t). The customer average and time average are

G=lim⁡N→∞1N∑n=1Ngn,H=lim⁡T→∞1T∫0Th(t) dt.G = \lim_{N\to\infty} \frac1N \sum_{n=1}^N g_n, \qquad H = \lim_{T\to\infty} \frac1T \int_0^T h(t)\,dt .G=N→∞lim​N1​n=1∑N​gn​,H=T→∞lim​T1​∫0T​h(t)dt.

When fnf_nfn​ is the indicator of [tn,tn+Wn)[t_n, t_n + W_n)[tn​,tn​+Wn​), gn=Wng_n = W_ngn​=Wn​ is the sojourn time and h(t)h(t)h(t) is the number in system, so H=λGH = \lambda GH=λG is L=λWL = \lambda WL=λW.

The ASSUMPTION of the paper is that for each nnn there is sn∈[0,∞)s_n \in [0,\infty)sn​∈[0,∞) with

  1. (i) fn(t)=0f_n(t) = 0fn​(t)=0 for t∉[tn,tn+sn]t \notin [t_n, t_n + s_n]t∈/[tn​,tn​+sn​];
  2. (ii) sn/n→0s_n / n \to 0sn​/n→0.

For signed fnf_nfn​ write fn+=max⁡[0,fn]f_n^+ = \max[0, f_n]fn+​=max[0,fn​], fn−=max⁡[0,−fn]f_n^- = \max[0, -f_n]fn−​=max[0,−fn​], and let gn±g_n^\pmgn±​, h±h^\pmh±, G±G^\pmG±, H±H^\pmH± be the corresponding totals, rates and averages.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2 (p. 986)

Assume (i), (ii) and (v) ∫0∞∣fn(t)∣ dt<∞\int_0^\infty |f_n(t)|\,dt < \infty∫0∞​∣fn​(t)∣dt<∞ for every nnn. If λ\lambdaλ, G+G^+G+ and G−G^-G− exist with 0<λ<∞0 < \lambda < \infty0<λ<∞ and G±<∞G^\pm < \inftyG±<∞, then GGG exists, equals G+−G−G^+ - G^-G+−G−, HHH exists, and

H=λG.(1)H = \lambda G. \tag{1}H=λG.(1)

Milestones

  • (2): for 0<λ<∞0 < \lambda < \infty0<λ<∞, N(t)/t→λN(t)/t \to \lambdaN(t)/t→λ if and only if tn/n→λ−1t_n / n \to \lambda^{-1}tn​/n→λ−1.
  • (3): for fn≥0f_n \ge 0fn​≥0, V(T)≤∫0Th(t) dt≤U(T)V(T) \le \int_0^T h(t)\,dt \le U(T)V(T)≤∫0T​h(t)dt≤U(T), where U(T)U(T)U(T) sums gng_ngn​ over arrived customers and V(T)V(T)V(T) over customers with tn+sn≤Tt_n + s_n \le Ttn​+sn​≤T.
  • (4): λG=lim⁡t→∞U(t)/t\lambda G = \lim_{t\to\infty} U(t)/tλG=limt→∞​U(t)/t.
  • sn/tn→0s_n / t_n \to 0sn​/tn​→0, and lim⁡U(t)/t=lim⁡V(t)/t\lim U(t)/t = \lim V(t)/tlimU(t)/t=limV(t)/t.
  • Theorem 1 (p. 985): for fn≥0f_n \ge 0fn​≥0 under (i)–(iv), H=λGH = \lambda GH=λG.
  • The identity ∫0Th+−∫0Th−=∫0Th\int_0^T h^+ - \int_0^T h^- = \int_0^T h∫0T​h+−∫0T​h−=∫0T​h and (6): G=G+−G−G = G^+ - G^-G=G+−G−, H=H+−H−H = H^+ - H^-H=H+−H−.

Companion results

  • The §3 counterexample: tn=nt_n = ntn​=n, indicator fnf_nfn​ with gn=1g_n = 1gn​=1, so λ=G=1\lambda = G = 1λ=G=1, but H=log⁡2H = \log 2H=log2; its support span sn=ns_n = nsn​=n satisfies (i) and fails (ii).
  • Corollary 3 (p. 988): if λ(ω)=λ\lambda(\omega) = \lambdaλ(ω)=λ is constant, the ensemble averages satisfy ∫H dP=λ∫G dP\int H\,dP = \lambda \int G\,dP∫HdP=λ∫GdP.
  • G=W<∞G = W < \inftyG=W<∞ implies Wn/n→0W_n / n \to 0Wn​/n→0 (p. 986), the step by which Theorem 1 contains L=λWL = \lambda WL=λW.

Significance

The result. H=λGH = \lambda GH=λG converts between a time average, which is what a system designer measures, and a customer average, which is what a customer experiences. Applied to different fnf_nfn​ it yields L=λWL = \lambda WL=λW, the relation between average work in system and average customer work, and relations between time-stationary and embedded-chain probabilities; §2 of the paper derives the GI/M/c/K relation this way. Because the support condition (i)–(ii) allows a customer's contribution to be interrupted (leaving and re-entering the system), it covers preemptive priority queues and nodes of networks, which the continuous-sojourn L=λWL = \lambda WL=λW theorem does not. The counterexample marks the boundary: with interrupted sojourns, indicator functions and finite λ\lambdaλ, GGG alone do not suffice.

Formalizing it. The result is proved on paper, with two steps delegated to earlier work "by mimicking" Lemma 1 and Theorem 2 of Stidham 1974. The indicator special case L=λWL = \lambda WL=λW (with strictly increasing arrivals) is already proved on Prove2Me as queueing_general_littles_law (wenxinzhang). This mission asks for the general, signed, pathwise statement and its proof steps, a counterexample with an exactly computed time average log⁡2\log 2log2, and the ensemble corollary.

Difficulty

The obvious argument, exchanging the time integral of hhh with the sum over customers, gives ∫0Th=∑n∫0Tfn\int_0^T h = \sum_n \int_0^T f_n∫0T​h=∑n​∫0T​fn​, but a customer that has arrived by TTT may contribute only part of its total gng_ngn​ by TTT. The sandwich V(T)≤∫0Th≤U(T)V(T) \le \int_0^T h \le U(T)V(T)≤∫0T​h≤U(T) only bounds this loss; the hard step is showing that U(t)/tU(t)/tU(t)/t and V(t)/tV(t)/tV(t)/t have the same limit, which needs sn/tn→0s_n / t_n \to 0sn​/tn​→0 to compare VVV at time ttt with UUU at a slightly earlier time. Without (ii) this fails, as the counterexample shows: customers there remain "open" for a window proportional to their index.

For signed fnf_nfn​ the sandwich is not available directly, and the proof splits fnf_nfn​ into positive and negative parts; the exchange of sum and integral then needs the finiteness of the parts on every [0,T][0,T][0,T].

Formalization scope

All statements except Corollary 3 are about one fixed sample path; the paper's "with probability one" is the pathwise statement applied to almost every path, and Corollary 3 states this explicitly with a probability measure and almost-sure hypotheses.

Conventions:

  • Customers are indexed from 000 in Lean; index nnn is the paper's customer n+1n+1n+1, so sn/n→0s_n/n \to 0sn​/n→0 is written sn/(n+1)→0s_n/(n+1) \to 0sn​/(n+1)→0.
  • Arrival epochs are Monotone with t0≥0t_0 \ge 0t0​≥0; ties are allowed.
  • fn:R→Rf_n : \mathbb R \to \mathbb Rfn​:R→R, but only values on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞) enter: (i) is required only for t≥0t \ge 0t≥0, gng_ngn​ integrates over [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞), and time averages integrate over [0,T][0,T][0,T].
  • (iv) and (v) are stated as integrability of fnf_nfn​ on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞); the page prints (iv) as "≤∞\le \infty≤∞", a misprint for "<∞< \infty<∞".
  • N(t)N(t)N(t) is the cardinality of {n:tn≤t}\{n : t_n \le t\}{n:tn​≤t}; hhh, UUU, VVV are infinite sums over all customers.
  • "HHH exists" includes integrability of hhh on every [0,T][0,T][0,T].
  • The page prints (6) as "G=G+−G+G = G^+ - G^+G=G+−G+"; the stated identity is G=G+−G−G = G^+ - G^-G=G+−G−, as the proof shows.

Added hypotheses: milestones (3), the h±h^\pmh± identity and (6) assume tn→∞t_n \to \inftytn​→∞, which the paper derives from (2); Corollary 3 assumes G(ω)G(\omega)G(ω) is integrable, which its definition of the ensemble average presupposes.

A formalization in which hhh sums only over arrived customers, or in which a non-integrable hhh or fnf_nfn​ has integral 000, would make the statements trivial or different; the definitions rule this out by summing over all customers and requiring integrability.

Needed infrastructure: Cesàro averages and counting functions of nondecreasing sequences, interchange of countable sums and integrals for locally finite families, and harmonic sums ∑m=⌈(k+1)/2⌉k1/m→log⁡2\sum_{m=\lceil (k+1)/2\rceil}^{k} 1/m \to \log 2∑m=⌈(k+1)/2⌉k​1/m→log2. The counting-function lemma (2) and the squeeze for UUU and VVV are reusable well beyond this mission. Proofs of any milestone are welcome independently.

Selected references

  • D. P. Heyman and S. Stidham, Jr., The relation between customer and time averages in queues, Operations Research 28(4):983–994, 1980. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.28.4.983
  • J. D. C. Little, A proof for the queuing formula: L = λW, Operations Research 9(3):383–387, 1961. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.9.3.383
  • S. Stidham, Jr., L = λW: a discounted analogue and a new proof, Operations Research 20(6):1115–1126, 1972. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.20.6.1115
  • S. Stidham, Jr., A last word on L = λW, Operations Research 22(2):417–421, 1974. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.22.2.417
  • S. L. Brumelle, On the relation between customer and time averages in queues, Journal of Applied Probability 8:508–520, 1971.
11 thms1 active userReviewed
ProbabilityStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Reflected Brownian Motion on an Orthant: The Skorokhod Construction Yields an Adapted, Almost Surely Unique, Time-Homogeneous Markov ProcessResearch Paper

Motivation

Reflected Brownian motion on the orthant is the diffusion that arises as the heavy-traffic limit of open networks of queues. In a KKK-station network the scaled queue-length vector lives in the nonnegative orthant R+K\mathbb R^K_+R+K​; in the interior it moves like a Brownian motion, and when a station empties the process is pushed back into the orthant in a direction determined by the routing of customers between stations. Harrison (1978) obtained such a limit for two queues in tandem, and Reiman (Open Queueing Networks in Heavy Traffic, Math. Oper. Res. 9 (1984)) showed that general KKK-station open networks lead exactly to the class of processes studied here.

Classical constructions of reflected diffusions (Stroock and Varadhan 1971, Watanabe 1971) require a smooth boundary and a reflection direction varying continuously on it. The orthant has corners and the reflection direction jumps between faces, so those results do not apply. Harrison and Reiman (Reflected Brownian Motion on an Orthant, Ann. Probab. 9 (1981)) construct the process pathwise, following Skorokhod's one-dimensional approach, and derive its Markov property from the construction. The process has since become the standard object in the diffusion approximation of queueing networks.

Setting

Fix a positive integer KKK. Vectors in RK\mathbb R^KRK are row vectors, indexed by j=1,…,Kj=1,\dots,Kj=1,…,K. Let AAA be a K×KK\times KK×K covariance matrix (symmetric, nonnegative definite), b∈RKb\in\mathbb R^Kb∈RK a drift vector, and Q=(qij)Q=(q_{ij})Q=(qij​) a nonnegative K×KK\times KK×K matrix with zeros on the diagonal and spectral radius strictly less than one. S=R+KS=\mathbb R^K_+S=R+K​ is the nonnegative orthant.

Let CCC be the space of continuous paths x:[0,∞)→RKx:[0,\infty)\to\mathbb R^Kx:[0,∞)→RK with the topology of uniform convergence on compact intervals, and CSC_SCS​ the paths with x(0)∈Sx(0)\in Sx(0)∈S. For x∈CSx\in C_Sx∈CS​, the Skorokhod problem asks for y,z∈Cy,z\in Cy,z∈C with, for every jjj,

zj(t)=xj(t)+yj(t)−∑i=1Kqij yi(t),zj(t)≥0,t≥0,(5–6)z_j(t)=x_j(t)+y_j(t)-\sum_{i=1}^K q_{ij}\,y_i(t),\qquad z_j(t)\ge 0,\qquad t\ge0, \tag{5–6}zj​(t)=xj​(t)+yj​(t)−i=1∑K​qij​yi​(t),zj​(t)≥0,t≥0,(5–6)

yjy_jyj​ nondecreasing with yj(0)=0y_j(0)=0yj​(0)=0 (7), and yjy_jyj​ increasing only at times ttt where zj(t)=0z_j(t)=0zj​(t)=0 (8). In matrix form, z=x+y(I−Q)z=x+y(I-Q)z=x+y(I−Q). Theorem 1 of the paper shows there is exactly one such pair, written y=ψ(x)y=\psi(x)y=ψ(x), z=ϕ(x)z=\phi(x)z=ϕ(x).

The process is obtained by feeding a Brownian path into this map. On a probability space (Ω,F,P)(\Omega,\mathcal F,P)(Ω,F,P) let XXX be a KKK-dimensional Brownian motion with covariance matrix AAA, drift bbb and X(0)∈SX(0)\in SX(0)∈S almost surely, with X(0)X(0)X(0) independent of the increments of XXX. Let Ft=F(X(s);0≤s≤t)\mathcal F_t=\mathcal F(X(s);0\le s\le t)Ft​=F(X(s);0≤s≤t). Set Y=ψ(X)Y=\psi(X)Y=ψ(X) and Z=ϕ(X)Z=\phi(X)Z=ϕ(X) where X∈CSX\in C_SX∈CS​, and Y=Z=0Y=Z=0Y=Z=0 on the exceptional null set. ZZZ is reflected Brownian motion on SSS with reflection matrix I−QI-QI−Q.

Formalization targets

Goal: Corollary 1

There is a family (κt)(\kappa_t)(κt​) of Markov transition kernels on RK\mathbb R^KRK, depending only on (Q,A,b)(Q,A,b)(Q,A,b), such that for every such XXX, YYY, ZZZ:

(a)Y(t), Z(t) are Ft-measurable, t≥0;\text{(a)}\quad Y(t),\ Z(t)\ \text{are } \mathcal F_t\text{-measurable},\ t\ge0;(a)Y(t), Z(t) are Ft​-measurable, t≥0; (b)(Y,Z) satisfies (1)–(4) a.s., and any pair satisfying (1)–(4) a.s. equals (Y,Z) a.s.;\text{(b)}\quad (Y,Z)\ \text{satisfies (1)–(4) a.s., and any pair satisfying (1)–(4) a.s. equals } (Y,Z) \text{ a.s.};(b)(Y,Z) satisfies (1)–(4) a.s., and any pair satisfying (1)–(4) a.s. equals (Y,Z) a.s.; (c)P[Z(s+t)∈B∣Fs]=κt(Z(s),B) a.s.,s,t≥0, B Borel.\text{(c)}\quad P\big[Z(s+t)\in B \mid \mathcal F_s\big]=\kappa_t\big(Z(s),B\big)\ \text{a.s.},\qquad s,t\ge0,\ B \text{ Borel}.(c)P[Z(s+t)∈B∣Fs​]=κt​(Z(s),B) a.s.,s,t≥0, B Borel.

Here (1)–(4) are (5)–(8) for the paths of XXX, YYY, ZZZ. The kernel is chosen before the probability space and the initial law, which is what "stationary transition probabilities" means.

Milestones

The milestones follow the proof of Theorem 1 on pp. 304–305:

  1. a positive diagonal Λ\LambdaΛ with ∥Λ−1QΛ∥<1\|\Lambda^{-1}Q\Lambda\|<1∥Λ−1QΛ∥<1 (Veinott scaling);
  2. (5)–(8) are invariant under (Q,x,y,z)↦(Λ−1QΛ,xΛ,yΛ,zΛ)(Q,x,y,z)\mapsto(\Lambda^{-1}Q\Lambda,x\Lambda,y\Lambda,z\Lambda)(Q,x,y,z)↦(Λ−1QΛ,xΛ,yΛ,zΛ);
  3. the key observation that (5)–(8) are equivalent to y∈C0y\in C_0y∈C0​, the fixed-point equation y=π(y)y=\pi(y)y=π(y) with π(y)(t)=sup⁡0≤s≤t[y(s)Q−x(s)]+\pi(y)(t)=\sup_{0\le s\le t}[y(s)Q-x(s)]^+π(y)(t)=sup0≤s≤t​[y(s)Q−x(s)]+, and z=x+y(I−Q)z=x+y(I-Q)z=x+y(I−Q);
  4. the contraction ∥π(y)−π(y′)∥≤α∥y−y′∥\|\pi(y)-\pi(y')\|\le\alpha\|y-y'\|∥π(y)−π(y′)∥≤α∥y−y′∥ on [0,T][0,T][0,T];
  5. convergence of the Picard iterates yn+1=π(yn)y^{n+1}=\pi(y^n)yn+1=π(yn), y0≡0y^0\equiv0y0≡0;
  6. the Lipschitz bound ∥ψ(x)−ψ(x′)∥≤∥x−x′∥/(1−α)\|\psi(x)-\psi(x')\|\le\|x-x'\|/(1-\alpha)∥ψ(x)−ψ(x′)∥≤∥x−x′∥/(1−α);
  7. Theorem 1 itself: existence and uniqueness, non-anticipation (9), continuity (10);
  8. the regeneration property (11): with x∗(t)=z(T)+x(T+t)−x(T)x^*(t)=z(T)+x(T+t)-x(T)x∗(t)=z(T)+x(T+t)−x(T), y∗(t)=y(T+t)−y(T)y^*(t)=y(T+t)-y(T)y∗(t)=y(T+t)−y(T), z∗(t)=z(T+t)z^*(t)=z(T+t)z∗(t)=z(T+t), one has y∗=ψ(x∗)y^*=\psi(x^*)y∗=ψ(x∗), z∗=ϕ(x∗)z^*=\phi(x^*)z∗=ϕ(x∗).

Milestone 7 is the platform theorem Reiman84.QueueLength.lemma_1, posed as an open target by an earlier mission (Reiman 1984 cites it as its Lemma 1). It is referenced here and not posed again.

Significance

Corollary 1 is what makes ZZZ a usable stochastic process: adaptedness and almost-sure uniqueness say ZZZ is determined by the driving Brownian motion in a non-anticipating way, and the Markov property with time-homogeneous kernels is the starting point for the change-of-variable formula of §3, for generators, for stationary distributions, and for the heavy-traffic limit theorems in which ZZZ appears as the limit. The pathwise map ϕ\phiϕ and its Lipschitz continuity are reused throughout queueing theory: the continuous-mapping argument for heavy-traffic limits rests on exactly the continuity (10) established here.

The results are classical, with complete published proofs. None of them has a machine-checked proof. Mathlib has the measure-theoretic layer (kernels, conditional expectation, independence) but no reflection maps, no construction of multidimensional Brownian motion with drift, and no Markov-process theory in continuous time. This mission provides a formal statement of the pathwise reflection theory and its probabilistic consequence on which such a development can build.

Difficulty

The pathwise part is a contraction argument, but the contraction is not in the original norm: the map y↦yQy\mapsto yQy↦yQ need not be a contraction for any standard norm when only the spectral radius of QQQ is below one. The proof first changes coordinates by a positive diagonal matrix, and the right norm must be matched to the row-vector convention. The fixed-point characterization also has to be shown equivalent to the complementarity condition (8), which is where the zero diagonal of QQQ enters.

For Corollary 1, the difficulty is measure-theoretic. Adaptedness requires measurability of a path functional with respect to the uncompleted natural filtration, which uses (9) and (10) and the fact that continuous paths are determined by countably many coordinates. The Markov property requires the regeneration identity (11) together with independence of the post-sss increments of XXX from Fs\mathcal F_sFs​, and a kernel that is jointly measurable and independent of the initial law. Conditioning on Fs\mathcal F_sFs​ alone, without identifying the future as a fixed functional of Z(s)Z(s)Z(s) and an independent Brownian motion, does not give a kernel that is the same for all sss.

Formalization scope

  • RK\mathbb R^KRK is Fin K → ℝ (paper index jjj = Lean index j−1j-1j−1), with K≥1K\ge1K≥1; row vector times matrix is Matrix.vecMul. Paths are functions ℝ → Fin K → ℝ; only times t≥0t\ge0t≥0 are constrained.
  • Spectral radius <1<1<1 is rendered as Qm→0Q^m\to0Qm→0, the rendering of Reiman84.QueueLength.lemma_1. AAA is PosSemidef.
  • (5)–(8) are the published Reiman84.QueueLength.IsReflectionPair; (8) reads "yjy_jyj​ is constant on every interval [s,t]⊆[0,∞)[s,t]\subseteq[0,\infty)[s,t]⊆[0,∞) on which zj>0z_j>0zj​>0". CSC_SCS​ is IsCPlus; uniform convergence on compacts is UocTendsto; Brownian motion from 000 with drift and covariance is IsDriftedBM.
  • The norm on C[0,T]C[0,T]C[0,T] is sup⁡0≤t≤T∥y(t)∥∞\sup_{0\le t\le T}\|y(t)\|_\inftysup0≤t≤T​∥y(t)∥∞​. The suprema in π\piπ and in the norm are real suprema, honest only for continuous paths, and every statement using them assumes continuity.
  • The paper's ∥P∥\|P\|∥P∥ is printed as the maximal row sum. Under the row-vector convention the contraction, Picard and Lipschitz steps need the maximal column sum; with the printed reading the contraction inequality is false (a nilpotent 3×33\times33×3 counterexample is recorded in those items). Veinott scaling is stated as printed; applying it to Q⊤Q^\topQ⊤ gives the column version.
  • The Brownian motion is X=X0+ξX=X_0+\xiX=X0​+ξ with ξ\xiξ a drifted Brownian motion from 000 and X0≥0X_0\ge0X0​≥0 a.s. independent of the whole process ξ\xiξ. Ft\mathcal F_tFt​ is the uncompleted σ-algebra generated by X(s)X(s)X(s), 0≤s≤t0\le s\le t0≤s≤t.
  • YYY and ZZZ enter Corollary 1 as hypotheses: a solution of (5)–(8) on {X∈CS}\{X\in C_S\}{X∈CS​}, zero elsewhere. That such processes exist is the existence part of Theorem 1, the referenced open item.
  • The kernel family is quantified before the probability space, so it cannot depend on sss, on Ω\OmegaΩ or on the law of X(0)X(0)X(0). A version of (c) with a kernel depending on these, with the completed or full σ-algebra in place of Fs\mathcal F_sFs​, or with one-dimensional marginals only, is a different and weaker statement and is ruled out.

Out of scope: Theorem 2 (the change-of-variable formula, which needs stochastic integration), the necessity of spectral radius <1<1<1, and §§3–4. Useful contributions beyond the milestones include a construction of multidimensional Brownian motion with drift in Mathlib, the Skorokhod map as a function on CSC_SCS​, and general lemmas on measurability of continuous path functionals.

Selected references

  • J. M. Harrison and M. I. Reiman, Reflected Brownian Motion on an Orthant, Annals of Probability 9(2), 302–308, 1981. https://doi.org/10.1214/aop/1176994471
  • M. I. Reiman, Open Queueing Networks in Heavy Traffic, Mathematics of Operations Research 9(3), 441–458, 1984. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.9.3.441
  • A. F. Veinott, Jr., Discrete Dynamic Programming with Sensitive Discount Optimality Criteria, Annals of Mathematical Statistics 40(5), 1635–1660, 1969. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoms/1177697379
  • A. V. Skorokhod, Stochastic Equations for Diffusion Processes in a Bounded Region, Theory of Probability and Its Applications 6(3), 264–274, 1961. https://doi.org/10.1137/1106035
  • D. W. Stroock and S. R. S. Varadhan, Diffusion Processes with Boundary Conditions, Communications on Pure and Applied Mathematics 24, 147–225, 1971. https://doi.org/10.1002/cpa.3160240206
12 thms1 active userReviewed
OptimizationProbabilityStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Mean-Variance Hedging in Continuous Time: The Feedback Futures Strategy Φ(G*) Minimizes the Expected Squared Deviation of Terminal Wealth from Any Target LevelResearch Paper

Motivation

A firm that will receive or deliver a quantity of a commodity, currency or security at a future date carries price risk until that date. When the asset itself cannot be traded in the meantime, the standard instrument for reducing that risk is a futures contract on a correlated asset: the firm takes a position in futures and adjusts it over time, and the gains or losses of the futures position offset part of the movement of its commitment. Choosing that position is the hedging problem. The classical answer, the minimum-variance hedge ratio, is a static one-period rule. Duffie and Richardson (Ann. Appl. Probab. 1991) solved the dynamic version in continuous time with a quadratic criterion: minimize the expected squared deviation of terminal wealth from a target. Their explicit feedback solution became a reference point for the later literature on mean-variance hedging in incomplete markets (Schweizer, Gouriéroux–Laurent–Pham, and others), where the same quadratic criterion is studied under general semimartingale prices.

Setting

Fix a horizon T>0T>0T>0 and a probability space (Ω,F,P)(\Omega,\mathcal F,P)(Ω,F,P) carrying a two-dimensional standard Brownian motion (B,ε)(B,\varepsilon)(B,ε) with its filtration F\mathbb FF. Let μ,σ,m,v,ρ\mu,\sigma,m,v,\rhoμ,σ,m,v,ρ be bounded measurable functions on [0,T][0,T][0,T], with ∣v∣|v|∣v∣ bounded away from zero and ρt∈[−1,1]\rho_t\in[-1,1]ρt​∈[−1,1]. The Brownian motion ξt=∫0tρs dBs+∫0t1−ρs2 dεs\xi_t=\int_0^t\rho_s\,dB_s+\int_0^t\sqrt{1-\rho_s^2}\,d\varepsilon_sξt​=∫0t​ρs​dBs​+∫0t​1−ρs2​​dεs​ has instantaneous correlation ρ\rhoρ with BBB. The committed asset SSS and the futures price FFF follow

dSt=μtSt dt+σtSt dBt,dFt=mtFt dt+vtFt dξt,S0,F0>0.dS_t=\mu_tS_t\,dt+\sigma_tS_t\,dB_t,\qquad dF_t=m_tF_t\,dt+v_tF_t\,d\xi_t,\qquad S_0,F_0>0.dSt​=μt​St​dt+σt​St​dBt​,dFt​=mt​Ft​dt+vt​Ft​dξt​,S0​,F0​>0.

The hedger is committed to kkk units of SSS at time TTT. A trading strategy is a progressively measurable process θ\thetaθ (the futures position) with E∫0Tθt2Ft2 dt<∞E\int_0^T\theta_t^2F_t^2\,dt<\inftyE∫0T​θt2​Ft2​dt<∞; Θ\ThetaΘ denotes the set of them. Its futures gain is the stochastic integral G(θ)t=∫0tθs dFsG(\theta)_t=\int_0^t\theta_s\,dF_sG(θ)t​=∫0t​θs​dFs​, and the terminal wealth is W(θ)=kST+G(θ)TW(\theta)=kS_T+G(\theta)_TW(θ)=kST​+G(θ)T​. Given a target level L∈RL\in\mathbb RL∈R, problem (3) is

min⁡θ∈ΘE[(W(θ)−L)2].\min_{\theta\in\Theta}E\big[(W(\theta)-L)^2\big].θ∈Θmin​E[(W(θ)−L)2].

With γt=mtσtρt/vt−μt\gamma_t=m_t\sigma_t\rho_t/v_t-\mu_tγt​=mt​σt​ρt​/vt​−μt​, the tracking process is Zt=kexp⁡(−∫tTγs ds)StZ_t=k\exp(-\int_t^T\gamma_s\,ds)S_tZt​=kexp(−∫tT​γs​ds)St​, so that ZT=kSTZ_T=kS_TZT​=kST​, and the feedback map is

Φ(Gt∗)=1Ft[mtvt2(L−Zt−Gt∗)−σtρtvtZt],\Phi(G^*_t)=\frac1{F_t}\Big[\frac{m_t}{v_t^2}(L-Z_t-G^*_t)-\frac{\sigma_t\rho_t}{v_t}Z_t\Big],Φ(Gt∗​)=Ft​1​[vt2​mt​​(L−Zt​−Gt∗​)−vt​σt​ρt​​Zt​],

where G∗G^*G∗ solves dGt∗=Φ(Gt∗) dFtdG^*_t=\Phi(G^*_t)\,dF_tdGt∗​=Φ(Gt∗​)dFt​, G0∗=0G^*_0=0G0∗​=0. The strategy φ=Φ(G∗)\varphi=\Phi(G^*)φ=Φ(G∗) depends only on the gains realized so far and the current price StS_tSt​.

Formalization targets

Goal: Proposition 1

φt=Φ(Gt∗)  solves  min⁡θ∈ΘE[(kST+G(θ)T−L)2]\varphi_t=\Phi(G^*_t)\ \text{ solves }\ \min_{\theta\in\Theta}E\big[(kS_T+G(\theta)_T-L)^2\big]φt​=Φ(Gt∗​)  solves  θ∈Θmin​E[(kST​+G(θ)T​−L)2]

for every commitment kkk, every target LLL and every solution G∗G^*G∗ of (10). No constant is hard-coded: the statement is the paper's for arbitrary coefficients satisfying the standing hypotheses.

Milestones

  1. Lemma 1: φ∈Θ\varphi\in\Thetaφ∈Θ is optimal iff E[(L−kST−G(φ)T) G(θ)T]=0E[(L-kS_T-G(\varphi)_T)\,G(\theta)_T]=0E[(L−kST​−G(φ)T​)G(θ)T​]=0 for every θ∈Θ\theta\in\Thetaθ∈Θ.
  2. Existence (§3.3): equation (10) has a solution with Gt∗∈L2(P)G^*_t\in L^2(P)Gt∗​∈L2(P).
  3. Itô dynamics of ZZZ: dZt=(γt+μt)Zt dt+σtZt dBtdZ_t=(\gamma_t+\mu_t)Z_t\,dt+\sigma_tZ_t\,dB_tdZt​=(γt​+μt​)Zt​dt+σt​Zt​dBt​.
  4. Moment equations for E(ZtGt)E(Z_tG_t)E(Zt​Gt​), E(Gt∗Gt)E(G^*_tG_t)E(Gt∗​Gt​) and E(Gt)E(G_t)E(Gt​), with G=G(θ)G=G(\theta)G=G(θ).
  5. Lemma 2: Ht=E[(L−Zt−Gt∗)G(θ)t]H_t=E[(L-Z_t-G^*_t)G(\theta)_t]Ht​=E[(L−Zt​−Gt∗​)G(θ)t​] satisfies H˙t=−(mt2/vt2)Ht\dot H_t=-(m_t^2/v_t^2)H_tH˙t​=−(mt2​/vt2​)Ht​.
  6. The solution of (13): Ht=H0exp⁡(−∫0tms2/vs2 ds)H_t=H_0\exp(-\int_0^tm_s^2/v_s^2\,ds)Ht​=H0​exp(−∫0t​ms2​/vs2​ds).

Two further items, not milestones, formalize §4: Lemma 3 (a solution of (3) is mean-variance efficient) and §4.1 (maximizing the quadratic utility E[W−cW2]E[W-cW^2]E[W−cW2], c>0c>0c>0, is problem (3) with L=1/(2c)L=1/(2c)L=1/(2c)).

Significance

Proposition 1 gives the optimal dynamic hedge in closed feedback form for every target level at once. Varying LLL traces out the whole mean-variance frontier of terminal wealth (Lemma 3), and the choice L=1/(2c)L=1/(2c)L=1/(2c) solves the quadratic-utility problem (§4.1); the minimum-variance hedge of §4.3 of the paper is obtained by optimizing over LLL. The result is also an instance of a general pattern: a quadratic hedging problem in an incomplete market reduces to an L2L^2L2 projection onto the space of attainable gains, and the projection is computed by a linear SDE.

The result is proved in the paper, in six pages. No machine-checked version of it, or of any continuous-time hedging result, exists on the platform. A formalization requires Itô's formula for products of Itô processes, the zero-mean property of square-integrable stochastic integrals, Fubini's theorem for moments, and existence for a linear SDE with an Itô-process forcing term; each of these is reusable well beyond this paper.

Difficulty

The projection step (Lemma 1) is Hilbert-space geometry and the final ODE step is Grönwall. The difficulty lies in between: the orthogonality E[(L−kST−GT∗)G(θ)T]=0E[(L-kS_T-G^*_T)G(\theta)_T]=0E[(L−kST​−GT∗​)G(θ)T​]=0 must be verified against every trading strategy θ\thetaθ, about which only E∫0Tθt2Ft2 dt<∞E\int_0^T\theta_t^2F_t^2\,dt<\inftyE∫0T​θt2​Ft2​dt<∞ is known. A computation that treats θ\thetaθ as bounded, continuous or simple does not suffice. Making the paper's moment computations rigorous requires controlling the integrability of products such as ZtθtFtZ_t\theta_tF_tZt​θt​Ft​ and Gt∗G(θ)tG^*_tG(\theta)_tGt∗​G(θ)t​, proving that the stochastic-integral parts of Itô's product rule are true martingales rather than local martingales, and differentiating expectations in time when the coefficients are only measurable, so that derivatives exist only almost everywhere.

Formalization scope

The stochastic layer is the published definition file Peng1990_SMP_Stochastic (the L2L^2L2 Itô integral and Itô processes on R≥0\mathbb R_{\ge0}R≥0​ time), imported, not redefined. The mission commits to the following conventions.

  • (B,ε)(B,\varepsilon)(B,ε) is one R2\mathbb R^2R2-valued standard Brownian motion; BBB is coordinate 0, ε\varepsilonε coordinate 1, and dξd\xidξ is expanded as ρ dB+1−ρ2 dε\rho\,dB+\sqrt{1-\rho^2}\,d\varepsilonρdB+1−ρ2​dε.
  • The filtration is the natural filtration of (B,ε)(B,\varepsilon)(B,ε), not its augmentation, and trading strategies are progressively measurable instead of predictable. Neither change alters the space of terminal gains.
  • Gains are relations: a gain process is any version of the Itô integral, and every statement quantifies over all versions.
  • The objective E[(W−L)2]E[(W-L)^2]E[(W−L)2] and variances take values in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞], so a non-square-integrable wealth cannot be optimal through a junk value 000; inner products carry explicit integrability.
  • ρt∈[−1,1]\rho_t\in[-1,1]ρt​∈[−1,1] (§3.1), not [0,1][0,1][0,1] (§2). The sign of vvv is free; only ∣v∣≥δ>0|v|\ge\delta>0∣v∣≥δ>0 is assumed.
  • "Φ(G∗)\Phi(G^*)Φ(G∗) defined by (9)–(11)" means: for every solution of (10), where a solution includes that Φ(G∗)\Phi(G^*)Φ(G∗) is a trading strategy. The paper takes this membership for granted.
  • Lemma 2 and the moment equations are stated in integral form (Ht=H0−∫0t(m2/v2)H dsH_t=H_0-\int_0^t(m^2/v^2)H\,dsHt​=H0​−∫0t​(m2/v2)Hds), which is the paper's "for almost every ttt" derivative together with absolute continuity; continuity of the coefficients is not assumed.
  • The display for dZdZdZ in the proof of Lemma 2 omits dtdtdt; the drift is (γt+μt)Zt dt(\gamma_t+\mu_t)Z_t\,dt(γt​+μt​)Zt​dt.
  • In §4.1, c>0c>0c>0 is assumed explicitly.

Proposition 1 would hold vacuously if equation (10) had no solution; the existence milestone rules this out and must be proved, not assumed. Contributions are welcome on Itô's product formula and the martingale property of Itô integrals in the Peng framework, on the existence of solutions of linear SDEs, and on the Grönwall-type uniqueness for (13).

Selected references

  • D. Duffie, H. R. Richardson, Mean-Variance Hedging in Continuous Time, The Annals of Applied Probability 1(1) (1991) 1–15. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoap/1177005978
  • S. Peng, A General Stochastic Maximum Principle for Optimal Control Problems, SIAM J. Control Optim. 28(4) (1990) 966–979. https://doi.org/10.1137/0328054
  • P. Protter, Stochastic Integration and Differential Equations, Springer, 1990. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-662-02619-9
  • D. G. Luenberger, Optimization by Vector Space Methods, Wiley, 1969.
  • M. Schweizer, Mean-Variance Hedging for General Claims, The Annals of Applied Probability 2(1) (1992) 171–179. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoap/1177005776
11 thms1 active userReviewed
Algorithmic Game TheoryConvex OptimizationOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Cooperative Fuzzy Games 1: A Balanced Game without Side Payments Has a Nonempty Core Containing the Core of Its Fuzzy ExtensionResearch Paper

Motivation

A game without side payments (an NTU game) describes cooperation in which utility cannot be transferred between players: each coalition AAA of players is assigned the set V(A)V(A)V(A) of payoff vectors it can secure on its own. The core is the set of payoffs to the grand coalition that no coalition can improve upon. Whether the core is nonempty is the basic stability question of cooperative game theory. For games with side payments the answer is the Bondareva–Shapley theorem. For NTU games it is Scarf's theorem (Scarf 1967): a balanced game has a nonempty core. Billera (1970) gave a convex version, in which the payoff sets are convex and balancedness is stated with weighted Minkowski sums.

Aubin's paper (Aubin 1981) obtains Billera's version of the theorem by a different route. Players may join coalitions at fractional rates of participation, and the paper first proves a core existence theorem for these fuzzy games. The game on ordinary coalitions is then embedded into a fuzzy game whose core lies inside the core of the original game.

Setting

The players are N={1,…,n}N = \{1,\dots,n\}N={1,…,n}. A coalition A⊆NA \subseteq NA⊆N is identified with its characteristic vector τA∈{0,1}n\tau^A \in \{0,1\}^nτA∈{0,1}n, and τN=(1,…,1)\tau^N = (1,\dots,1)τN=(1,…,1). A fuzzy coalition is a vector τ∈[0,1]n\tau \in [0,1]^nτ∈[0,1]n of participation rates with support Aτ={i:τi>0}A_\tau = \{i : \tau_i > 0\}Aτ​={i:τi​>0}. Write (τ⋅c)i=τici(\tau\cdot c)_i = \tau_i c_i(τ⋅c)i​=τi​ci​, Rτ=τ⋅Rn\mathbb{R}^\tau = \tau\cdot\mathbb{R}^nRτ=τ⋅Rn for the vectors vanishing off AτA_\tauAτ​, R+τ\mathbb{R}^\tau_+R+τ​ for its nonnegative part, and R˚+τ\mathring{\mathbb{R}}^\tau_+R˚+τ​ for the vectors strictly positive on AτA_\tauAτ​.

A fuzzy game without side payments assigns to each τ≥0\tau \ge 0τ≥0 a nonempty, closed, convex set V(τ)⊆RτV(\tau)\subseteq\mathbb{R}^\tauV(τ)⊆Rτ. Each V(τ)V(\tau)V(τ) is comprehensive, meaning V(τ)=V(τ)−R+τV(\tau) = V(\tau)-\mathbb{R}^\tau_+V(τ)=V(τ)−R+τ​, and bounded above, meaning V(τ)⊆C−R+τV(\tau)\subseteq C-\mathbb{R}^\tau_+V(τ)⊆C−R+τ​ for some CCC. The map is positively homogeneous: V(tτ)=tV(τ)V(t\tau) = tV(\tau)V(tτ)=tV(τ) for every t>0t>0t>0. Its core is the set of c∈V(τN)c\in V(\tau^N)c∈V(τN) such that τ⋅c∉V(τ)−R˚+τ\tau\cdot c\notin V(\tau)-\mathring{\mathbb{R}}^\tau_+τ⋅c∈/V(τ)−R˚+τ​ for every fuzzy coalition τ≠0\tau\neq 0τ=0. With the support function v(τ,λ)=sup⁡c∈V(τ)∑iλiciv(\tau,\lambda)=\sup_{c\in V(\tau)}\sum_i\lambda_i c_iv(τ,λ)=supc∈V(τ)​∑i​λi​ci​ and the simplex MnM^nMn, a weak (resp. strong) canonical cooperative equilibrium is a c∈V(τN)c\in V(\tau^N)c∈V(τN) together with a λˉ∈Mn\bar\lambda\in M^nλˉ∈Mn (resp. λˉ\bar\lambdaλˉ with all coordinates positive) satisfying ∑iλˉiτici≥v(τ,λˉ)\sum_i\bar\lambda^i\tau_ic_i\ge v(\tau,\bar\lambda)∑i​λˉiτi​ci​≥v(τ,λˉ) for every τ∈[0,1]n\tau\in[0,1]^nτ∈[0,1]n.

A usual NTU game lives on a family C\mathcal{C}C of coalitions that contains NNN and every singleton. For each A∈CA\in\mathcal{C}A∈C, the set V(A)⊆RAV(A)\subseteq\mathbb{R}^AV(A)⊆RA is nonempty, closed, convex, comprehensive and bounded above. A balance of τ\tauτ is a vector of weights m≥0m\ge 0m≥0 on C\mathcal{C}C with ∑A∋im(A)=τi\sum_{A\ni i}m(A)=\tau_i∑A∋i​m(A)=τi​ for every iii, and C(τ)\mathcal{C}(\tau)C(τ) is the set of balances of τ\tauτ. The fuzzy extension of the game is

πV(τ)=⋃m∈C(τ) ∑A∈Cm(A) V(A),\pi V(\tau)=\bigcup_{m\in\mathcal{C}(\tau)}\ \sum_{A\in\mathcal{C}} m(A)\,V(A),πV(τ)=m∈C(τ)⋃​ A∈C∑​m(A)V(A),

and the game is balanced if V(N)=πV(τN)V(N)=\pi V(\tau^N)V(N)=πV(τN).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 7.1

For a balanced game without side payments,

∅≠core⁡(πV)⊆core⁡(V),CCEstrong(V)⊆core⁡(πV)⊆CCEweak(V),\emptyset\neq\operatorname{core}(\pi V)\subseteq\operatorname{core}(V),\qquad \mathrm{CCE}_{\rm strong}(V)\subseteq\operatorname{core}(\pi V)\subseteq\mathrm{CCE}_{\rm weak}(V),∅=core(πV)⊆core(V),CCEstrong​(V)⊆core(πV)⊆CCEweak​(V),

and in particular core⁡(V)≠∅\operatorname{core}(V)\neq\emptysetcore(V)=∅.

Milestones

  • Proposition 3.1: c∈V(τN)c\in V(\tau^N)c∈V(τN) is in the core iff the maximum complaint α(c)=sup⁡τ≠0inf⁡λ∈Mτ[v(τ,λ)−∑iλiτici]\alpha(c)=\sup_{\tau\neq0}\inf_{\lambda\in M^\tau}[v(\tau,\lambda)-\sum_i\lambda^i\tau_ic_i]α(c)=supτ=0​infλ∈Mτ​[v(τ,λ)−∑i​λiτi​ci​] is ≤0\le 0≤0.
  • Proof of Theorem 3.1(b): if VVV is superadditive, V(τ)+V(σ)⊆V(τ+σ)V(\tau)+V(\sigma)\subseteq V(\tau+\sigma)V(τ)+V(σ)⊆V(τ+σ), then τ↦v(τ,λ)\tau\mapsto v(\tau,\lambda)τ↦v(τ,λ) is concave on R+n\mathbb{R}^n_+R+n​.
  • Theorem 3.1: strong equilibria lie in the core, and for a superadditive game the core lies in the set of weak equilibria.
  • Theorem 5.1: a superadditive fuzzy game has a nonempty core.
  • §7, (6), (7), (11): πV\pi VπV is a superadditive fuzzy game that extends VVV, and its support function is πv(τ,λ)=sup⁡m∈C(τ)∑Am(A)v(A,λ)\pi v(\tau,\lambda)=\sup_{m\in\mathcal{C}(\tau)}\sum_A m(A)v(A,\lambda)πv(τ,λ)=supm∈C(τ)​∑A​m(A)v(A,λ).
  • §7 and the proof of Theorem 7.1: under balancedness, core⁡(πV)⊆core⁡(V)\operatorname{core}(\pi V)\subseteq\operatorname{core}(V)core(πV)⊆core(V), and the equilibria of VVV coincide with those of πV\pi VπV.

Significance

Theorem 7.1 gives the core existence result for convex NTU games under Billera's balancedness condition. Its proof goes through a statement about fuzzy coalitions, Theorem 5.1, which uses no combinatorial pivoting. That theorem also has independent uses. Its fuzzy core is the solution concept that §4 of the paper identifies with Walras equilibria of exchange economies. The canonical cooperative equilibria give a price-like certificate, a common rate of transfer λˉ\bar\lambdaλˉ, that sandwiches the core.

The results are classical and proved. Prove2Me holds no statement of Scarf's or Billera's theorem, of NTU cores, or of balancedness for games without side payments, and Mathlib has none of these notions. The mission produces faithful statements of the paper's chain of results, and their proofs once solvers close them. It also builds reusable infrastructure: support functions of comprehensive sets, Minkowski combinations indexed by balances, and positively homogeneous set-valued maps.

Difficulty

Most of §7 is bookkeeping with Minkowski sums. The hard part is Theorem 5.1, the existence of a point in the fuzzy core. The core is defined by infinitely many exclusion conditions, one for each τ∈[0,1]n\tau\in[0,1]^nτ∈[0,1]n, so a finite intersection argument does not apply directly. The paper's route works with prices: it uses the superdifferential of the concave map τ↦v(τ,λ)\tau\mapsto v(\tau,\lambda)τ↦v(τ,λ) at τN\tau^NτN, Ky Fan's inequality on a truncated simplex where all λi≥ε\lambda_i\ge\varepsilonλi​≥ε, and a limit as ε→0\varepsilon\to0ε→0. That limit requires compactness of the approximating payoffs, and at the boundary of the simplex the superdifferential map is not upper semicontinuous. Theorem 3.1(b) needs a minisup theorem for a function that is concave in τ\tauτ and convex and lower semicontinuous in λ\lambdaλ. Mathlib has neither Ky Fan's inequality nor this minimax theorem in that form.

Formalization scope

All statements import one definitions file, FuzzyGames.NTUCore.Basic. The formalization commits to the following conventions.

  • Players are Fin n, and payoffs, fuzzy coalitions and rates of transfer are Fin n → ℝ, ordered coordinatewise. Rτ\mathbb{R}^\tauRτ is encoded as "vanishes where τi=0\tau_i=0τi​=0", which equals τ⋅Rn\tau\cdot\mathbb{R}^nτ⋅Rn for τ≥0\tau\ge0τ≥0.
  • Fuzzy games are defined directly on the orthant τ≥0\tau\ge0τ≥0, the paper's extension of VVV from [0,1]n[0,1]^n[0,1]n by homogeneity. Homogeneity holds for every t>0t>0t>0, and superadditivity holds on R+n\mathbb{R}^n_+R+n​.
  • Support functions, α\alphaα and πv\pi vπv take values in EReal, so an unbounded supremum is +∞+\infty+∞ and never a junk 000.
  • The supremum defining α(c)\alpha(c)α(c) ranges over τ≠0\tau\neq0τ=0. Since M0=∅M^0=\emptysetM0=∅, including τ=0\tau=0τ=0 would make α≡+∞\alpha\equiv+\inftyα≡+∞ and Proposition 3.1 false. Blocking coalitions are likewise τ≠0\tau\neq0τ=0, as in §3 (4).
  • C\mathcal{C}C is a finite family of nonempty coalitions that contains NNN and every singleton. "∀A≠∅\forall A\neq\emptyset∀A=∅" in §7 ranges over C\mathcal{C}C.
  • The paper leaves n≥1n\ge1n≥1 implicit. Theorem 3.1(b) and Theorem 5.1 carry 0<n0<n0<n: for n=0n=0n=0 the simplex is empty while the core is not.
  • In §7 (11), πv(τ,λ)\pi v(\tau,\lambda)πv(τ,λ), which the paper uses without defining it, is taken to be the extension §6 (2) applied to A↦v(A,λ)A\mapsto v(A,\lambda)A↦v(A,λ), for λ≥0\lambda\ge0λ≥0.
  • The §7 sentence after (5) is stated with two extra conclusions: πV(τ)\pi V(\tau)πV(τ) is nonempty and contained in Rτ\mathbb{R}^\tauRτ. These are the remaining requirements of §3 (3) that are needed to apply Theorem 5.1.
  • Sums and scalings of sets are Mathlib's pointwise operations.

The fuzzy-game axioms are a Prop-valued structure and are hypotheses of every theorem. The core and the equilibria are defined for an arbitrary set-valued map, so the theorems about πV\pi VπV do not presuppose that it is a fuzzy game. That fact is the content of the §7 milestones and is not assumed. Non-vacuity has been checked locally on a concrete instance: V(τ)={c∈Rτ:c≤τ}V(\tau)=\{c\in\mathbb{R}^\tau: c\le\tau\}V(τ)={c∈Rτ:c≤τ} is a superadditive fuzzy game, and V(A)={c∈RA:c≤τA}V(A)=\{c\in\mathbb{R}^A:c\le\tau^A\}V(A)={c∈RA:c≤τA} is a balanced game on every admissible C\mathcal{C}C, with (1,…,1)(1,\dots,1)(1,…,1) in both cores.

Contributions are welcome at every level: the §7 Minkowski-sum lemmas, the support-function identities, and a minisup or Ky Fan theorem in the form the proofs need. Reusable pieces include support functions of comprehensive sets and Sion-type minimax.

Selected references

  • J.-P. Aubin, Cooperative Fuzzy Games, Mathematics of Operations Research 6(1) (1981) 1–13. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.6.1.1
  • H. E. Scarf, The Core of an N Person Game, Econometrica 35(1) (1967) 50–69. https://doi.org/10.2307/1909888
  • L. J. Billera, Some Theorems on the Core of an n-Person Game without Side-Payments, SIAM Journal on Applied Mathematics 18(3) (1970) 567–579. https://doi.org/10.1137/0118053
  • K. Fan, A Minimax Inequality and Applications, in O. Shisha (ed.), Inequalities III, Academic Press (1972) 103–113.
12 thms1 active userReviewed
Algorithmic Game Theory·Captain: mikedeng1

Perfect Equilibrium in a Bargaining Model: The Perfect Equilibrium Partitions Are the Nonempty Closed Intervals A = Δ₁ and B = Δ₂ = A − εResearch Paper

Motivation

Alternating-offer bargaining asks how an agreement is selected when two people can keep making proposals until one accepts. A prediction based only on behavior at the start may rely on threats that would no longer be sensible after a rejection. Ariel Rubinstein's 1982 paper studies strategies after every possible sequence of offers and gives a characterization of the partitions compatible with perfect equilibrium. Its setting has a unit pie, complete information, no fixed last round, and preferences that may describe more than a particular discount formula.

The question matters for sequential bargaining models in which the order of moves and the cost of delay affect the agreement. The paper distinguishes the set obtained when player 1 offers first from the set obtained when player 2 offers first. It also provides applications to fixed bargaining costs and fixed discount factors. This mission targets the paper's general characterization, from which those examples can be studied without building a new equilibrium concept for each preference family.

Setting

A partition is a number s∈S=[0,1]s\in S=[0,1]s∈S=[0,1]: player 1 receives sss of the unit pie and player 2 receives 1−s1-s1−s. An outcome (s,t)(s,t)(s,t) means that the offer sss is accepted in period ttt; (0,∞)(0,\infty)(0,∞) denotes perpetual disagreement. Periods of actual play start at 1. The paper also uses (s,0)(s,0)(s,0) when comparing acceptance of a current offer with a future outcome. Each player i∈{1,2}i\in\{1,2\}i∈{1,2} has a complete, reflexive, transitive preference relation ≽i\succcurlyeq_i≽i​ on outcomes. Strict preference ≻i\succ_i≻i​ and indifference ∼i\sim_i∼i​ are derived from it.

The game alternates proposals and responses. One player offers a partition, the other accepts or rejects, and rejection makes the responder the next proposer. A strategy specifies what a player does after every possible history, including histories inconsistent with the player's earlier plans. A perfect equilibrium requires the relevant player's continuation to withstand every alternative continuation strategy at each rejected history and to make a planned acceptance or rejection consistent with the current offer. The empty history is included, so the opening proposer must also have no profitable deviation.

Write AAA for the set of player-1 shares reached by perfect equilibria when player 1 opens, and BBB for the corresponding set when player 2 opens. Perpetual disagreement contributes no share to either set. Define Δ⊆S×S\Delta\subseteq S\times SΔ⊆S×S by a pair of one-period thresholds: for (x,y)∈Δ(x,y)\in\Delta(x,y)∈Δ, yyy is the smallest share whose immediate acceptance player 1 weakly prefers to (x,1)(x,1)(x,1), and xxx is the largest share whose immediate acceptance player 2 weakly prefers to (y,1)(y,1)(y,1). Let Δ1\Delta_1Δ1​ and Δ2\Delta_2Δ2​ be its coordinate projections. All four sets contain numbers interpreted as player-1 shares, even when player 2 moves first. These are the objects of Sections 2–5.

Formalization targets

Characterization

Under the paper's five preference assumptions (A-1)–(A-5), the goal is its THEOREM on p. 106:

A=Δ1≠∅,B=Δ2≠∅,A=\Delta_1\ne\varnothing,\qquad B=\Delta_2\ne\varnothing,A=Δ1​=∅,B=Δ2​=∅,

with AAA and BBB nonempty closed intervals and some e≥0e\ge 0e≥0 satisfying

B={a−e:a∈A}.B=\{a-e:a\in A\}.B={a−e:a∈A}.

The translation parameter is allowed to be zero, and either interval may be a single point. The goal fixes the paper's general shape without choosing a particular utility representation or assuming immediate agreement in every equilibrium.

Milestone statements

The attack path follows Lemmas 1–4 and Propositions 1–4 in their printed order. The lemmas constrain how a partition in one opening order relates to a feasible continuation in the other. Proposition 1 places each pair in Δ\DeltaΔ inside A×BA\times BA×B; Proposition 2 asserts existence; Proposition 3 describes Δ\DeltaΔ as a closed segment parallel to the diagonal; Proposition 4 gives the reverse containment of AAA and BBB in the threshold projections. Each numbered result is a separate theorem target.

Significance

The theorem identifies the full set of equilibrium partitions from preference comparisons one period apart. Nonemptiness says the model admits at least one equilibrium partition in either opening order. The interval conclusion describes cases with multiple equilibrium shares, while the translate relation states exactly how reversing the first mover changes the two sets. In the paper's discounting example, a single share is selected under the stated parameter conditions; in a fixed-cost boundary case, multiple shares can occur. These are applications in Section 6, not assumptions of the general target.

Rubinstein proved the result in 1982. Here the definitions and theorem statements are Lean drafts; the numbered targets and the main theorem still require machine-checked proofs. A local verification module establishes that one discounting instance satisfies the first three axioms and that the paper's Section 3 strategy example accepts its first offer in period 1. Completing the mission would give a reusable formal account of an infinite-horizon alternating-offer game and its subgame equilibrium conditions, alongside the paper's characterization.

Difficulty

A first-round equilibrium condition does not control what a strategy promises after an offer is rejected. The paper's equilibrium definition checks the entire continuation at every history, with the player's role changing after each rejection. As a result, showing that a proposed share is an equilibrium partition requires more than checking the opening offer: the answer and the next proposal must remain consistent throughout the game tree. The model also allows arbitrary complete preferences satisfying axioms, so a calculation with one discount function cannot establish the general theorem.

The boundary at a zero share requires care. Assumption (A-2) asserts strict preference for earlier positive shares; it says nothing directly about a player receiving zero. The printed proof of Lemma 1 invokes it for a comparison that can occur at that boundary. The local lemma drafts explicitly carry the paper's (A-4) closedness axiom to support that comparison. This added assumption, and its propagation to Lemmas 2–4, is disclosed in the audit notes rather than silently attributed to the Section 4 statement.

Formalization scope

Lean represents SSS as the subtype of real numbers in [0,1][0,1][0,1]. Outcomes are an option type: an agreement contains a partition and a natural-number period, while none is perpetual disagreement. This prevents an endless play from acquiring a default last partition. Strategies are unrestricted functions of lists of past offers. The play uses the first accepted offer, with period number one greater than its zero-based sequence index. A subgame after a rejected history restarts the period count and swaps the opening role when the history has odd length. The perfect-equilibrium predicate includes the empty history; acceptance comparisons use period 0 for the offer already on the table.

The threshold correspondence uses actual least and greatest elements among partitions in SSS. No real infimum or supremum supplies a default for an empty candidate set. “Closed interval” in the goal means an explicit [ℓ,u][\ell,u][ℓ,u] with ℓ≤u\ell\le uℓ≤u. “A−eA-eA−e” is the image of AAA under a↦a−ea\mapsto a-ea↦a−e. Proposition 3's “parallel line segment” is the full image of a nonempty interval under x↦(x,x−e)x\mapsto(x,x-e)x↦(x,x−e). These readings exclude a vacuous equilibrium set, a disagreement-to-zero coercion, and a hard-coded discounting special case.

The common outcome and preference definitions, the history-based strategy and play, and the equilibrium predicate are reusable for other alternating-offer questions. Contributions toward their structural properties, the numbered milestones, and the full theorem are in scope. The two displayed claims inside proofs and the fixed-cost and discounting conclusions are deferred to keep this proposal on the theorem's numbered path. Existing platform entries on Nash's axiomatic bargaining solution and a sealed-offer double auction concern different objects; neither supplies this game's equilibrium definition.

Selected references

  • Ariel Rubinstein, Perfect Equilibrium in a Bargaining Model, Econometrica 50(1), 97–109, 1982. DOI 10.2307/1912531.
14 thms1 active userReviewed
Complexity TheoryDynamic ProgrammingMathematical Logic·Captain: mikedeng1

The Complexity of Markov Decision Processes V: A Quantified Boolean Formula Is True Iff Its Partially Observed Markov Decision Process Has a Zero-Cost PolicyResearch Paper

Motivation

A Markov decision process is the standard model of sequential decision making under uncertainty: a controller observes the state of a finite system, chooses a decision, pays a cost, and the system moves to a random next state. In many applications (maintenance, inventory with unreliable records, robotics, medical treatment) the controller does not see the state itself, only partial information about it. This is the partially observed problem, and the usual way to solve it is to replace the state by the conditional distribution of the state given the observations (Åström 1965; Bertsekas). That reformulation has an infinite state space, and Smallwood and Sondik (1973) showed that the finite-horizon cost-to-go is nevertheless piecewise linear, but with a number of pieces that may grow exponentially with the horizon.

Papadimitriou and Tsitsiklis (Math. Oper. Res. 12(3), 1987) asked whether this blow-up is an artefact of the reformulation or intrinsic to the problem. Their Theorem 6 answers it: deciding whether a partially observed process can achieve a given expected cost is PSPACE-hard, already for stationary processes and horizons shorter than the number of states. This mission formalizes the reduction behind that theorem.

Setting

A partially observed stationary Markov decision process has a finite state set SSS, a partition Π\PiΠ of SSS, and an initial state s0s_0s0​. For a state sss write z(s)∈Πz(s) \in \Piz(s)∈Π for the set containing it. Each set zzz carries a nonempty finite set DzD_zDz​ of decisions; decision i∈Dzi \in D_zi∈Dz​ costs c(z,i)c(z, i)c(z,i) and moves a current state s∈zs \in zs∈z to the next state s′s's′ with probability p(s,s′,i)p(s, s', i)p(s,s′,i). The controller sees only the sequence of sets visited, so a policy π\piπ maps each observation sequence z0,…,ztz_0, \dots, z_tz0​,…,zt​ to a decision in DztD_{z_t}Dzt​​. For a horizon TTT, the expected cost of π\piπ is

Jπ(T)=Eπ[∑t=0Tc(z(st),π(z(s0),…,z(st)))],J_\pi(T) = \mathbb{E}_\pi\Bigl[\sum_{t=0}^{T} c\bigl(z(s_t), \pi(z(s_0), \dots, z(s_t))\bigr)\Bigr],Jπ​(T)=Eπ​[t=0∑T​c(z(st​),π(z(s0​),…,z(st​)))],

and the optimal cost is inf⁡πJπ(T)\inf_\pi J_\pi(T)infπ​Jπ​(T).

A quantified Boolean formula is Q1x1⋯Qnxn F(x1,…,xn)Q_1 x_1 \cdots Q_n x_n\, F(x_1, \dots, x_n)Q1​x1​⋯Qn​xn​F(x1​,…,xn​) with each Qj∈{∃,∀}Q_j \in \{\exists, \forall\}Qj​∈{∃,∀} and FFF a conjunction of mmm clauses C1,…,CmC_1, \dots, C_mC1​,…,Cm​, each a set of literals xjx_jxj​ or ¬xj\neg x_j¬xj​. It is true if there is a value of x1x_1x1​ such that for all values of x2x_2x2​, and so on, FFF comes out true. Deciding truth (QSAT) is PSPACE-complete (Stockmeyer and Meyer 1973).

From a formula with m≥1m \ge 1m≥1 clauses the paper builds a process MφM_\varphiMφ​: an initial state, six states Aij,Aij′,Tij,Tij′,Fij,Fij′A_{ij}, A'_{ij}, T_{ij}, T'_{ij}, F_{ij}, F'_{ij}Aij​,Aij′​,Tij​,Tij′​,Fij​,Fij′​ per clause iii and variable jjj, end states Ai,n+1,Ai,n+1′A_{i,n+1}, A'_{i,n+1}Ai,n+1​,Ai,n+1′​, and one absorbing state, so ∣S∣=6mn+2m+2|S| = 6mn + 2m + 2∣S∣=6mn+2m+2. The first transition chooses a clause uniformly; primed states record that the chosen clause is not yet satisfied; existential variables are set by decisions and universal ones by fair coins; the only nonzero cost, 111, is paid at Ai,n+1′A'_{i,n+1}Ai,n+1′​. The horizon is T=2n+2T = 2n + 2T=2n+2.

Formalization targets

Goal: the reduction is correct

For every formula φ\varphiφ in the paper's QSAT class (an alternating prefix beginning with ∃x1\exists x_1∃x1​ and ending with ∀xn\forall x_n∀xn​, and three literals per clause), with m≥1m \ge 1m≥1 clauses and T=2n+2T = 2n+2T=2n+2,

T<∣S∣,(∃π: Jπ(T)=0)  ⟺  φ is true,inf⁡πJπ(T)≤0  ⟺  φ is true.T < |S|, \qquad \bigl(\exists \pi:\ J_\pi(T) = 0\bigr) \iff \varphi \text{ is true}, \qquad \inf_\pi J_\pi(T) \le 0 \iff \varphi \text{ is true}.T<∣S∣,(∃π: Jπ​(T)=0)⟺φ is true,πinf​Jπ​(T)≤0⟺φ is true.

The goal states all three claims the paper makes: the horizon bound (p. 448), the existence of a zero-cost policy (p. 449), and the bound on the optimum (p. 448).

Milestones

  1. The cost splits over the clause chosen at time 1: each clause is chosen with probability 1/m1/m1/m, and a policy has zero expected cost iff it has zero cost for every choice of clause.
  2. If a trajectory of positive probability ends in Ai,n+1′A'_{i,n+1}Ai,n+1′​, the expected cost is at least 2−n/m2^{-n}/m2−n/m.
  3. A zero-cost policy makes the formula true.
  4. A true formula yields a zero-cost policy.

Significance

Theorem 6 locates the partially observed finite-horizon problem in the complexity landscape: unless P = PSPACE there is no polynomial-time algorithm for it, even for stationary processes with short horizons. The paper's Corollary 1 strengthens this into evidence that no polynomial-size precomputed controller exists either. Together these results explain why exact algorithms for partially observed processes are exponential and motivated the later work on approximation and on restricted policy classes.

The formalization adds a machine-checked proof of the correctness of the reduction, the step on which the hardness claim rests, together with a reusable definition of a finite partially observed process with observation-history policies and of quantified Boolean formulas. The paper's argument is a short paragraph; a formal proof has to make precise how a policy that only sees observation sequences determines a strategy for the existential player. As far as we know, no machine-checked proof of this reduction exists.

Difficulty

The "if" direction is a direct translation of a winning strategy into a policy. The "only if" direction is where the work is. A zero-cost policy acts on observation sequences, and the paper argues that it never learns which clause was chosen. Under the paper's own partition this is not literally true: the sets TjT_jTj​ and Tj′T'_jTj′​ differ, so the observations reveal whether the chosen clause was already satisfied. The existential strategy must therefore be extracted from the policy's behaviour on the observation histories in which the clause is still unsatisfied, and one must check that it is a single strategy, independent of the clause, that satisfies every clause against every choice of the universal variables. The bound of milestone 2 also requires tracking the probability of a single trajectory through the coin flips.

Formalization scope

The process is a Lean structure POMDP S Z with an observation map obs : S → Z encoding the partition, nonempty finite decision types D z, real costs c z i, and next-state laws given as Mathlib PMFs, so every transition row is a probability vector. A policy is a function List Z → (z : Z) → D z of the earlier observations and the current one. The expected cost is a finite sum over trajectories x0,…,xTx_0, \dots, x_Tx0​,…,xT​ of their probability times ∑t=0Tc\sum_{t=0}^{T} c∑t=0T​c, and the optimum is the infimum over all policies. Paper clause CiC_iCi​ and variable xjx_jxj​ are Lean indices i−1i - 1i−1 and j−1j - 1j−1.

Choices made explicit:

  • Horizon. The paper prints T=2m+2T = 2m + 2T=2m+2 but says it is "just enough time for the process to reach one of Ai,n+1A_{i,n+1}Ai,n+1​ or Ai,n+1′A'_{i,n+1}Ai,n+1′​", which happens at time 2n+12n+12n+1. With the printed value and m<nm < nm<n the cost is never paid and every formula would map to a zero-cost process. We use T=2n+2T = 2n+2T=2n+2.
  • The set AjA_jAj​. The partition sentence puts all AijA_{ij}Aij​ and Aij′A'_{ij}Aij′​ in one set AjA_jAj​; the decision sentence mentions "the set Aj′A'_jAj′​". We follow the partition sentence.
  • The new state reached from Ai,n+1A_{i,n+1}Ai,n+1​ and Ai,n+1′A'_{i,n+1}Ai,n+1′​ is unspecified; it gets its own set, one zero-cost decision and a self-loop.
  • Formulas. The general QBF definition allows any quantifier prefix and clause width. Every theorem assumes IsPaperQSAT, which requires the paper's alternating prefix ∃x1∀x2⋯∀xn\exists x_1 \forall x_2 \cdots \forall x_n∃x1​∀x2​⋯∀xn​ with n>0n>0n>0 even and three literals per clause. Clauses are sets of literals; three witnesses allow repetitions. m≥1m \ge 1m≥1 is also a hypothesis.
  • Decisions are nonempty; rows are probability vectors.

Policies see only observation sequences. A formalization in which the policy reads the state would make the "only if" direction false and the reduction meaningless; one in which it sees only the current observation would make the "if" direction false. Neither is admissible.

Not formalized: PSPACE-hardness itself (Mathlib has no PSPACE or polynomial-time reductions), the polynomial-time computability of the construction, the membership of the problem in PSPACE (sketched on p. 449), Corollary 1 (a Σ2p\Sigma_2^pΣ2p​ collapse) and Corollary 2 (NP-completeness of the unobserved case, stated without proof).

The definitions of partially observed processes and quantified Boolean formulas are reusable. Contributions of lemmas on trajectory sums (marginalising later coordinates, the probability of a fixed prefix) are welcome; they also serve the other missions of this series.

Selected references

  • C. H. Papadimitriou and J. N. Tsitsiklis, The Complexity of Markov Decision Processes, Mathematics of Operations Research 12(3), 1987, 441–450. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.12.3.441
  • L. J. Stockmeyer and A. R. Meyer, Word problems requiring exponential time, Proc. 5th ACM STOC, 1973, 1–9. https://doi.org/10.1145/800125.804029
  • R. D. Smallwood and E. J. Sondik, The optimal control of partially observable Markov processes over a finite horizon, Operations Research 21(5), 1973, 1071–1088. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.21.5.1071
  • K. J. Åström, Optimal control of Markov processes with incomplete state information, Journal of Mathematical Analysis and Applications 10, 1965, 174–205. https://doi.org/10.1016/0022-247X(65)90154-X
  • D. P. Bertsekas, Dynamic Programming: Deterministic and Stochastic Models, Prentice-Hall, 1987.
8 thms1 active userReviewed
Algorithmic Game TheoryCombinatoricsOptimization+1·Captain: mikedeng1

Assortment Optimisation Under a General Discrete Choice Model: A Tight Analysis of Revenue-Ordered Assortments V: Stackelberg Matroid Pricing Is an Assortment Problem Under a Regular Choice ModelResearch Paper

Motivation

In Stackelberg network pricing a leader sets prices on some resources, and a follower then buys the cheapest structure available to them, paying the leader for the priced resources they use. The Stackelberg Minimum Spanning Tree problem, introduced by Cardinal, Demaine, Fiorini, Joret, Langerman, Newman and Weimann (Algorithmica 2011), is the version in which the follower buys a minimum spanning tree. The best known approximation factors for it are those of uniform pricing, which gives every priced edge the same price (Berbeglia–Joret, p. 21).

Independently, revenue management studies assortment optimisation: a seller chooses which products to offer, and customers choose among the offered products according to a discrete choice model. Berbeglia and Joret (arXiv:1606.01371, Algorithmica 2020) analyse the revenue-ordered heuristic (offer every product whose revenue is at least some threshold) under any regular choice model, and prove tight approximation bounds.

§4.6 of that paper shows that the two problems are the same problem: a Stackelberg Matroid pricing instance is an assortment problem under a regular choice model, and uniform pricing is the revenue-ordered heuristic on that model. The bounds of Cardinal et al. on uniform pricing thus become special cases of the general bounds on revenue-ordered assortments. This mission formalizes that correspondence (Theorem 4.16).

Setting

Choice model. Let C\mathcal CC be a finite set of products. A system of choice probabilities assigns to each offered set S⊆CS\subseteq\mathcal CS⊆C and product xxx a probability P(x,S)\mathcal P(x,S)P(x,S), with no-purchase probability P(0,S)=1−∑x∈SP(x,S)\mathcal P(0,S)=1-\sum_{x\in S}\mathcal P(x,S)P(0,S)=1−∑x∈S​P(x,S). It is regular if (i) all probabilities are nonnegative, (ii) P(x,S)=0\mathcal P(x,S)=0P(x,S)=0 for x∉Sx\notin Sx∈/S, (iii) ∑x∈SP(x,S)≤1\sum_{x\in S}\mathcal P(x,S)\le1∑x∈S​P(x,S)≤1, and (iv) P(x,S)≥P(x,S′)\mathcal P(x,S)\ge\mathcal P(x,S')P(x,S)≥P(x,S′) whenever S⊆S′S\subseteq S'S⊆S′ and x∈S∪{0}x\in S\cup\{0\}x∈S∪{0}. With revenues r:C→R>0r:\mathcal C\to\mathbb R_{>0}r:C→R>0​, rev(S)=∑x∈SP(x,S)r(x)\mathrm{rev}(S)=\sum_{x\in S}\mathcal P(x,S)r(x)rev(S)=∑x∈S​P(x,S)r(x) and OPT=max⁡Srev(S)\mathrm{OPT}=\max_S\mathrm{rev}(S)OPT=maxS​rev(S). The revenue-ordered assortment generated by yyy is {y′∈C:r(y′)≥r(y)}\{y'\in\mathcal C:r(y')\ge r(y)\}{y′∈C:r(y′)≥r(y)}.

Greedy algorithm. Given a family of independent sets, a linear ordering LLL and a set FFF, greedy(F,L)\mathrm{greedy}(F,L)greedy(F,L) scans FFF in the order induced by LLL, starting from ∅\emptyset∅, and adds each element that keeps the current set independent.

Stackelberg Matroid problem. An instance is a matroid M=(E,X)M=(E,\mathcal X)M=(E,X), a bipartition E=R⊔BE=R\sqcup BE=R⊔B into red and blue elements, and red costs c:R→R>0c:R\to\mathbb R_{>0}c:R→R>0​; some base of MMM lies inside RRR. The leader chooses prices p:B→R>0p:B\to\mathbb R_{>0}p:B→R>0​. The customer buys a minimum-weight base by running greedy on R∪BR\cup BR∪B with an ordering L∗L^*L∗ that is non-decreasing in weight (ccc on RRR, ppp on BBB) and puts blue elements first on ties. The leader earns revStack(p,L∗)=∑e∈B∩greedyM(R∪B,L∗)p(e)\mathrm{rev}_{\mathrm{Stack}}(p,L^*)=\sum_{e\in B\cap\mathrm{greedy}_M(R\cup B,L^*)}p(e)revStack​(p,L∗)=∑e∈B∩greedyM​(R∪B,L∗)​p(e).

The assortment instance. Let c1<⋯<ckc_1<\dots<c_kc1​<⋯<ck​ be the distinct red costs. Products are C=B×{c1,…,ck}\mathcal C=B\times\{c_1,\dots,c_k\}C=B×{c1​,…,ck​} with r((e,q))=∣B∣ qr((e,q))=|B|\,qr((e,q))=∣B∣q. The auxiliary matroid M′M'M′ on R∪CR\cup\mathcal CR∪C declares XXX independent when it holds at most one pair (e,q)(e,q)(e,q) per blue eee and (R∩X)∪{e:(e,q)∈X}(R\cap X)\cup\{e:(e,q)\in X\}(R∩X)∪{e:(e,q)∈X} is independent in MMM. With an ordering LLL of R∪CR\cup\mathcal CR∪C that is non-decreasing in cost and puts products before red elements on ties, P((e,q),S)=1/∣B∣\mathcal P((e,q),S)=1/|B|P((e,q),S)=1/∣B∣ if (e,q)∈greedyM′(R∪S,L)(e,q)\in\mathrm{greedy}_{M'}(R\cup S,L)(e,q)∈greedyM′​(R∪S,L) and 000 otherwise.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 4.16 (p. 24)

For the instance above, with B≠∅B\ne\emptysetB=∅ and every admissible LLL:

P is regular,r>0,max⁡S⊆Crev(S)=max⁡p>0, L∗revStack(p,L∗),\mathcal P\ \text{is regular},\quad r>0,\qquad \max_{S\subseteq\mathcal C}\mathrm{rev}(S)=\max_{p>0,\ L^*}\mathrm{rev}_{\mathrm{Stack}}(p,L^*),P is regular,r>0,S⊆Cmax​rev(S)=p>0, L∗max​revStack​(p,L∗),

and uniform pricing corresponds to revenue-ordered assortments: for each cic_ici​ some revenue-ordered assortment earns the revenue of the uniform price cic_ici​, and every revenue-ordered assortment earns the revenue of some uniform price cic_ici​.

Milestones

  1. Lemma 4.14 (p. 23): for F⊆F′F\subseteq F'F⊆F′, ∣greedyM(F′,L)∣≥∣greedyM(F,L)∣|\mathrm{greedy}_M(F',L)|\ge|\mathrm{greedy}_M(F,L)|∣greedyM​(F′,L)∣≥∣greedyM​(F,L)∣ and F∩greedyM(F′,L)⊆greedyM(F,L)F\cap\mathrm{greedy}_M(F',L)\subseteq\mathrm{greedy}_M(F,L)F∩greedyM​(F′,L)⊆greedyM​(F,L).
  2. Property (14) (p. 31): orderings agreeing on a block partition make greedy pick the same number of elements per block.
  3. Lemma 4.15 (p. 23): the Stackelberg revenue does not depend on the compatible ordering.
  4. M′M'M′ is a matroid (p. 32).
  5. Regularity of P\mathcal PP (pp. 32–33).
  6. rev(S)\mathrm{rev}(S)rev(S) equals the Stackelberg revenue of pS(e)=min⁡{q:(e,q)∈S}p_S(e)=\min\{q:(e,q)\in S\}pS​(e)=min{q:(e,q)∈S} (pp. 33–34).
  7. Rounding prices up to the cost levels does not decrease revenue (p. 34).
  8. For prices in {c1,…,ck}∪{+∞}\{c_1,\dots,c_k\}\cup\{+\infty\}{c1​,…,ck​}∪{+∞}, rev(Sp)\mathrm{rev}(S_p)rev(Sp​) equals the Stackelberg revenue of ppp (pp. 34–35).

Significance

Theorem 4.16 transfers every guarantee for revenue-ordered assortments under regular models to uniform pricing in Stackelberg Matroid pricing. Specialising Theorems 3.1, 3.2 and 3.3 of the paper through it gives exactly the three bounds on uniform pricing proved by Cardinal et al. for Stackelberg Minimum Spanning Tree (Theorem 3 of their paper), which those authors showed to be tight (p. 24). It also places uniform pricing inside a general picture: it is a threshold policy for a regular choice model whose purchase probabilities come from a matroid greedy algorithm, and the paper notes that the argument extends to polymatroids.

The result is proved in the paper, with two steps left to the reader (M′M'M′ is a matroid) or justified briefly (rounding prices). No machine-checked proof exists. A formalization also produces a reusable greedy algorithm on finite matroids with its monotonicity properties (Lemma 4.14, (14)), which Mathlib at the pinned revision does not have.

Difficulty

The obvious argument identifies the customer's run of greedy on (M,R∪B)(M,R\cup B)(M,R∪B) with the run of greedy on (M′,R∪S)(M',R\cup S)(M′,R∪S) step by step. That identification fails as stated: the choice probabilities are defined with one fixed ordering LLL of R∪CR\cup\mathcal CR∪C, while the customer's ordering L∗L^*L∗ is any ordering compatible with the prices, and ties among blue elements of equal price, or between a product and a red element of equal cost, may be broken differently. Equality of revenues therefore needs the tie-independence property (14) applied to M′M'M′ as well as to MMM, which in turn needs M′M'M′ to be a matroid. A second gap is axiom (iv) for the no-purchase option: it requires that offering more products never decreases the number of products greedy selects, which is Lemma 4.14 (i)–(ii) for M′M'M′ combined, not a pointwise statement. Finally, the paper's "+∞+\infty+∞" price must be handled with the red base: without a base inside RRR, a blue element priced above all costs can still be bought and the optimum is unbounded.

Formalization scope

  • Elements and orderings. The matroid is a Mathlib Matroid α; RRR, BBB are Finset α with R∪BR\cup BR∪B equal to the ground set; costs and prices are functions α → ℝ, used only on RRR and BBB. A linear ordering is a duplicate-free List covering the set; greedy on FFF scans the whole list and skips elements outside FFF, so FFF is never re-sorted.
  • Greedy is defined for an arbitrary independence predicate on finite sets, so that it applies to M′M'M′ before M′M'M′ is shown to be a matroid.
  • Customer model. Compatibility (15a)–(15b), including blue priority on ties, is part of the definition of an admissible customer ordering. The red base is a field of every instance.
  • Assortment instance. Elements of R∪CR\cup\mathcal CR∪C live in α ⊕ (α × ℝ). The paper's conditions (1)–(2) for M′M'M′ contain two typos (a missing "∈X\in X∈X" and X\mathcal XX for XXX); the intended conditions are formalized. The price +∞+\infty+∞ is the real number 1+∑f∈Rc(f)1+\sum_{f\in R}c(f)1+∑f∈R​c(f), strictly above every red cost.
  • Goal shape. The theorem is stated for the explicit instance of the proof, for every admissible LLL. The optimum of the Stackelberg side is a maximum (IsGreatest) over positive real prices and all compatible customer orderings. Cost levels are quantified as elements of the set of red costs rather than by index.
  • Ruled out. An existential statement ("some regular instance has the same optimum") is met by a single product with revenue OPTStack\mathrm{OPT}_{\mathrm{Stack}}OPTStack​ and is not this theorem; so is a customer model without tie-breaking, a formalization without the red base, or Lemma 4.14 only for F=F′F=F'F=F′.

Contributions welcome: proofs of Lemma 4.14 and (14) for Mathlib matroids (reusable beyond this mission), the matroid property of parallel extensions such as M′M'M′, and the three revenue identities.

Selected references

  • G. Berbeglia and G. Joret, Assortment Optimisation Under a General Discrete Choice Model: A Tight Analysis of Revenue-Ordered Assortments, arXiv:1606.01371v3, 2019 (Algorithmica, 2020). https://arxiv.org/abs/1606.01371
  • J. Cardinal, E. D. Demaine, S. Fiorini, G. Joret, S. Langerman, I. Newman and O. Weimann, The Stackelberg Minimum Spanning Tree Game, Algorithmica 59(2):129–144, 2011. https://doi.org/10.1007/s00453-009-9299-y
  • A. Schrijver, Combinatorial Optimization: Polyhedra and Efficiency, Vol. B, Algorithms and Combinatorics 24, Springer, 2003 (matroids and the greedy algorithm). https://link.springer.com/book/9783540443896
14 thms1 active userReviewed
Convex OptimizationOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

A Numerically Stable Dual Method for Solving Strictly Convex Quadratic Programs: The Dual Algorithm Solves the QP or Detects Its Infeasibility in Finitely Many StepsResearch Paper

Motivation

Strictly convex quadratic programs — minimize a positive definite quadratic subject to linear inequalities — are the subproblems solved at every iteration of successive quadratic programming (SQP) methods for nonlinear optimization, and they arise directly in least-squares estimation with constraints, portfolio selection and model predictive control. In SQP the unconstrained minimizer of the quadratic model is available at no cost, while a feasible point is not.

D. Goldfarb and A. Idnani (Math. Programming 27 (1983) 1–33) proposed a dual active-set method that exploits this asymmetry. It starts at the unconstrained minimizer, which is optimal for the problem with all constraints removed, and adds violated constraints one at a time while keeping the current point optimal for the subproblem defined by the current active set. No phase 1 is needed. The method, usually called the Goldfarb–Idnani algorithm, is the basis of widely used solvers (for example the quadprog package in R and QuadProg++), and the paper proves that it terminates finitely with a correct answer.

Earlier dual methods for quadratic programming include the modified-simplex methods of Lemke (Management Science 8 (1962) 442–453) and of Van de Panne and Whinston (1964), which the paper compares with its own in Section 7.

Setting

Fix n,m∈Nn, m \in \mathbb Nn,m∈N, a vector a∈Rna \in \mathbb R^na∈Rn, a symmetric positive definite n×nn\times nn×n matrix GGG, an n×mn\times mn×m matrix CCC with columns n1,…,nmn_1,\dots,n_mn1​,…,nm​, and b∈Rmb \in \mathbb R^mb∈Rm. The quadratic program (1.1) is

min⁡x f(x)=aTx+12xTGxsubject tosi(x)=niTx−bi≥0,i∈K={1,…,m}.\min_x\ f(x) = a^{\mathsf T}x + \tfrac12 x^{\mathsf T}Gx \quad\text{subject to}\quad s_i(x) = n_i^{\mathsf T}x - b_i \ge 0,\quad i \in K = \{1,\dots,m\}.xmin​ f(x)=aTx+21​xTGxsubject tosi​(x)=niT​x−bi​≥0,i∈K={1,…,m}.

The gradient is g(x)=Gx+ag(x) = Gx + ag(x)=Gx+a. For J⊆KJ \subseteq KJ⊆K, the subproblem P(J)P(J)P(J) keeps only the constraints indexed by JJJ; P(∅)P(\emptyset)P(∅) is solved by x0=−G−1ax^0 = -G^{-1}ax0=−G−1a. A set A⊆KA \subseteq KA⊆K is linearly independent if the normals nin_ini​, i∈Ai\in Ai∈A, are.

For an independent AAA, let NNN be the matrix with columns nin_ini​, i∈Ai\in Ai∈A, and define

N∗=(NTG−1N)−1NTG−1,H=G−1−G−1N(NTG−1N)−1NTG−1.N^* = (N^{\mathsf T}G^{-1}N)^{-1}N^{\mathsf T}G^{-1},\qquad H = G^{-1} - G^{-1}N(N^{\mathsf T}G^{-1}N)^{-1}N^{\mathsf T}G^{-1}.N∗=(NTG−1N)−1NTG−1,H=G−1−G−1N(NTG−1N)−1NTG−1.

The multipliers are u(x)=N∗g(x)u(x) = N^*g(x)u(x)=N∗g(x); for a constraint p∉Ap \notin Ap∈/A with normal n+=npn^+ = n_pn+=np​ the infeasibility multipliers are r=N∗n+r = N^*n^+r=N∗n+; a superscript +++ denotes the same objects for A+=A∪{p}A^+ = A\cup\{p\}A+=A∪{p}.

An S-pair (x,A)(x, A)(x,A) is an independent active set AAA with si(x)=0s_i(x) = 0si​(x)=0 for i∈Ai\in Ai∈A and xxx optimal for P(A)P(A)P(A). A V-triple (x,A,p)(x, A, p)(x,A,p) has p∉Ap\notin Ap∈/A, A+A^+A+ independent, sp(x)<0s_p(x) < 0sp​(x)<0, si(x)=0s_i(x) = 0si​(x)=0 for i∈Ai \in Ai∈A, H+g(x)=0H^+g(x) = 0H+g(x)=0 and u+(x)=(N+)∗g(x)≥0u^+(x) = (N^+)^*g(x) \ge 0u+(x)=(N+)∗g(x)≥0.

The dual algorithm starts from (x0,∅)(x^0, \emptyset)(x0,∅). In Step 1 it stops if xxx is feasible; otherwise it picks any violated constraint ppp. In Step 2 it moves along the primal direction z=Hn+z = Hn^+z=Hn+ and the dual direction (−r;1)(-r; 1)(−r;1) with step t=min⁡{t1,t2}t = \min\{t_1, t_2\}t=min{t1​,t2​}, where t1t_1t1​ is the largest step that keeps the multipliers nonnegative and t2=−sp(x)/zTn+t_2 = -s_p(x)/z^{\mathsf T}n^+t2​=−sp​(x)/zTn+ makes constraint ppp active. If both are infinite it reports infeasibility. A full step (t=t2t = t_2t=t2​) adds ppp and returns to Step 1. A partial step (t=t1<t2t = t_1 < t_2t=t1​<t2​), or a dual step (z=0z = 0z=0), drops a constraint kkk attaining t1t_1t1​ and repeats Step 2.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3 (p. 11)

For every choice of the violated constraint ppp and of the dropped constraint kkk:

no run from (x0,∅) is infinite, and every run that cannot continue ends in {STOP at an optimal x of (1.1), orSTOP with {x:CTx≥b}=∅.\text{no run from } (x^0,\emptyset) \text{ is infinite, and every run that cannot continue ends in } \begin{cases}\text{STOP at an optimal } x \text{ of (1.1)}, \text{ or}\\ \text{STOP with } \{x : C^{\mathsf T}x \ge b\} = \emptyset.\end{cases}no run from (x0,∅) is infinite, and every run that cannot continue ends in {STOP at an optimal x of (1.1), orSTOP with {x:CTx≥b}=∅.​

Milestones, in attack order

  1. Properties (2.6)–(2.9) (p. 5): Hw=0  ⟺  w∈range⁡NHw = 0 \iff w \in \operatorname{range} NHw=0⟺w∈rangeN; H⪰0H \succeq 0H⪰0; HGH=HHGH = HHGH=H; N∗GH=0N^*GH = 0N∗GH=0.
  2. Optimality conditions (2.3)–(2.4) (p. 5): on the manifold of AAA, xxx solves P(A)P(A)P(A) iff N∗g(x)≥0N^*g(x) \ge 0N∗g(x)≥0 and Hg(x)=0Hg(x) = 0Hg(x)=0.
  3. Lemma 1 (p. 8): along xˉ=x+tHn+\bar x = x + tHn^+xˉ=x+tHn+ from a V-triple, H+g(xˉ)=0H^+g(\bar x) = 0H+g(xˉ)=0, the constraints of AAA stay active, u+(xˉ)=u+(x)+t(−r;1)u^+(\bar x) = u^+(x) + t(-r;1)u+(xˉ)=u+(x)+t(−r;1) and sp(xˉ)=sp(x)+t zTn+s_p(\bar x) = s_p(x) + t\,z^{\mathsf T}n^+sp​(xˉ)=sp​(x)+tzTn+.
  4. Theorem 1 (pp. 8–9): the step t=min⁡{t1,t2}t = \min\{t_1,t_2\}t=min{t1​,t2​} increases sps_psp​ and fff; a partial step yields a V-triple, a full step an S-pair.
  5. Theorem 2 (p. 10): if np=Nrn_p = Nrnp​=Nr and sp(x)<0s_p(x) < 0sp​(x)<0 at an S-pair, then r≤0r \le 0r≤0 means P(A∪{p})P(A\cup\{p\})P(A∪{p}) is infeasible; otherwise dropping a minimizing kkk gives a V-triple.
  6. One round of Step 2 (p. 11): from an S-pair and a violated ppp, at most ∣A∣|A|∣A∣ partial or dual steps and one final step end either in infeasibility of (1.1) or in a new S-pair (xˉ,Aˉ∪{p})(\bar x, \bar A \cup\{p\})(xˉ,Aˉ∪{p}) with Aˉ⊆A\bar A\subseteq AAˉ⊆A and f(xˉ)>f(x)f(\bar x) > f(x)f(xˉ)>f(x).

Significance

Theorem 3 is the correctness certificate of the Goldfarb–Idnani method: whatever rule an implementation uses to choose the entering and leaving constraints, it cannot cycle and its answer is right. In particular the infeasibility verdict is a proof that (1.1) has no feasible point, which matters in SQP where infeasible subproblems trigger a different branch of the outer method. The intermediate results (the operator identities, Lemma 1, Theorems 1–2) are the standard analysis of dual active-set methods for quadratic programming.

The result is proved in the paper; to our knowledge it has not been machine-checked. A formal development produces verified projector identities for N∗N^*N∗ and HHH, a verified KKT characterization for equality-active subproblems, and a verified finite-termination proof for a nondeterministic algorithm with an explicit step relation. The platform already has a proved KKT sufficiency theorem for general convex programs (ConvexOptimization.kkt_sufficient_for_convex), stated over EuclideanSpace with general convex functions and gradient fields; it can serve as background for the sufficiency half of milestone 2, but it is not stated in this mission's matrix objects.

Difficulty

The obvious termination argument is that fff increases strictly at every iteration and there are finitely many active sets. It fails as stated: partial steps may leave xxx unchanged (the dual steps of Step 2(c)(ii)), so fff is only nondecreasing between consecutive states. A termination proof therefore needs a measure that also decreases along steps that do not move xxx. Any such argument relies on invariants (independence of A+A^+A+, nonnegativity of the multipliers, sp<0s_p < 0sp​<0 along partial steps) that hold only on reachable states, and the operators N∗N^*N∗ and HHH are meaningful only while those invariants hold. Correctness of the infeasibility verdict requires the dependent case (Theorem 2), not only Theorem 1.

Formalization scope

Vectors are Fin n → ℝ, GGG is Matrix (Fin n) (Fin n) ℝ with G.PosDef, CCC is Matrix (Fin n) (Fin m) ℝ, and active sets are Finset (Fin m). Multiplier vectors are indexed by constraint index (Fin m → ℝ, zero off the active set), not by position in AAA. Lean's matrix inverse returns 000 for singular matrices, so every statement about N∗N^*N∗ and HHH assumes G≻0G \succ 0G≻0 and an independent active set (directly, or through an S-pair or V-triple).

The algorithm is the inductive relation Step on states step1 x A u, step2 x A p u⁺, stopOptimal x, stopInfeasible, with one transition per admissible choice of ppp and kkk. Infinite step lengths are separate transitions; a tie t1=t2t_1 = t_2t1​=t2​ takes the full step, as the paper tests t=t2t = t_2t=t2​ first. The running value of fff and the factorizations of Section 4 are not part of the state.

Explicit readings of the paper's words:

  • "solves the QPP or indicates infeasibility in a finite number of steps" is: no infinite sequence of Step transitions from the Step-0 state, and every reachable state without a successor is a STOP whose verdict is correct (optimal for (1.1), or (1.1) infeasible);
  • "S-pair" is: AAA independent and active at xxx, with xxx optimal for P(A)P(A)P(A) (the reading every use in the paper needs);
  • in Theorem 1 the partial-step clause carries t<t2t < t_2t<t2​ (as in its proof), and the multiplier printed uj+1+u^+_{j+1}uj+1+​ in (3.16) is uq+1+u^+_{q+1}uq+1+​, the entry belonging to ppp;
  • "an S-pair can never reoccur" is expressed as the strict increase f(xˉ)>f(x)f(\bar x) > f(x)f(xˉ)>f(x) in milestone 6.

Property (2.10), printed HH+=H+HH^+ = H^+HH+=H+, is false unless G=IG = IG=I and is not formalized. Equality constraints (1.2), Section 4 (numerically stable implementation), Sections 5–6 (computations), Section 7 (comparisons) and the Appendix example are out of scope.

A trivializing formalization is ruled out: the goal quantifies over every run of the relation (not one selection rule, not "some run terminates"), the infeasibility verdict is about (1.1) itself, and the algorithm is a relation that always has a successor until a STOP, so correctness cannot hold because a run gets stuck.

Needed infrastructure: Schur-complement and projector identities for N∗N^*N∗ and HHH; first-order optimality for convex quadratics on affine subspaces with inequality multipliers; well-foundedness arguments for a nondeterministic relation. The operator identities and the KKT characterization are reusable for other active-set and SQP analyses. Contributions of proofs of any milestone, and of reusable lemmas about N∗N^*N∗ and HHH, are welcome.

Selected references

  • D. Goldfarb and A. Idnani, A numerically stable dual method for solving strictly convex quadratic programs, Mathematical Programming 27 (1983) 1–33. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF02591962
  • C. E. Lemke, A method of solution for quadratic programs, Management Science 8 (1962) 442–453. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.8.4.442
  • J. Nocedal and S. J. Wright, Numerical Optimization, 2nd ed., Springer, 2006, Chapter 16. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-0-387-40065-5
9 thms1 active userReviewed
OptimizationProbabilityStatistics·Captain: mikedeng1

Statistics of Robust Optimization: A Generalized Empirical Likelihood Approach 2: Empirical Likelihood Intervals for the Optimal Value inf_x E[ℓ(x;ξ)] Have Exact Coverage P(χ²₁ ≤ ρ)Research Paper

Why coverage of an optimal value matters

Many stochastic optimization problems choose a decision by minimizing an expected loss. The optimum depends on an unknown distribution, so a data-based optimum alone gives no measure of uncertainty about the best achievable expected loss. This mission concerns a confidence set for that optimal value, rather than a confidence set for the decision itself. The result of Duchi, Glynn, and Namkoong shows that a broad class of divergence neighborhoods of the empirical distribution yields a calibrated limit for this set. The same construction covers nonsmooth losses and constrained decisions when the regularity assumptions below hold.

The paper develops generalized empirical likelihood for smooth functionals of a distribution and then applies it to optimization. Its Theorem 3 states the exact asymptotic coverage result for the optimal value; Appendix C identifies the functional derivative, while Appendix B gives the uniform linearization and expansion on which calibration rests. The statistical result is proved in the paper. The mission asks for a machine-checked development of its statements and proof under an explicit nondegeneracy condition required by the paper's general coverage theorem.

Decisions, losses, and divergence neighborhoods

Let X⊆Rd\mathcal X\subseteq\mathbb R^dX⊆Rd be a nonempty compact decision set. An observation ξ\xiξ has population law P0P_0P0​, and ℓ(x;ξ)∈R\ell(x;\xi)\in\mathbb Rℓ(x;ξ)∈R is the loss at decision xxx. The quantity of interest is the optimal-value functional

Topt(P)=inf⁡x∈XEP[ℓ(x;ξ)].T_{\rm opt}(P)=\inf_{x\in\mathcal X}\mathbb E_P[\ell(x;\xi)].Topt​(P)=x∈Xinf​EP​[ℓ(x;ξ)].

The observations ξ1,…,ξn\xi_1,\ldots,\xi_nξ1​,…,ξn​ are independent and identically distributed with law P0P_0P0​. Write P^n\widehat P_nPn​ for their empirical distribution. A candidate distribution supported on the indexed observations is represented by nonnegative weights pip_ipi​ with ∑ipi=1\sum_i p_i=1∑i​pi​=1. Indexed weights also cover samples with repeated observations. For a convex divergence generator fff normalized by f(1)=f′(1)=0f(1)=f'(1)=0f(1)=f′(1)=0 and f′′(1)=2f''(1)=2f′′(1)=2, its divergence from the empirical law is Df(p∥P^n)=n−1∑if(npi)D_f(p\|\widehat P_n)=n^{-1}\sum_i f(np_i)Df​(p∥Pn​)=n−1∑i​f(npi​). Assumption A further requires fff to be three times continuously differentiable near 111; it permits f(0)=+∞f(0)=+\inftyf(0)=+∞.

At radius ρ/n\rho/nρ/n, the divergence ball consists of the weights with ∑if(npi)≤ρ\sum_i f(np_i)\le\rho∑i​f(npi​)≤ρ. The confidence set is its image under ToptT_{\rm opt}Topt​:

Cn,ρ={Topt(p):Df(p∥P^n)≤ρ/n}.C_{n,\rho}=\{T_{\rm opt}(p):D_f(p\|\widehat P_n)\le\rho/n\}.Cn,ρ​={Topt​(p):Df​(p∥Pn​)≤ρ/n}.

Assumption B makes X\mathcal XX compact and requires ℓ(⋅;ξ)\ell(\cdot;\xi)ℓ(⋅;ξ) to be Lipschitz on it with a measurable random coefficient M(ξ)M(\xi)M(ξ). The theorem adds finite second moments for MMM and for the loss at one feasible decision. These conditions control losses at every feasible decision. They also make the population and weighted empirical infima finite on the cases used in the limit.

Formalization targets

The goal is the exact asymptotic coverage of the population optimal value, with x⋆x^\starx⋆ the unique optimizer and Var⁡P0(ℓ(x⋆;ξ))>0\operatorname{Var}_{P_0}(\ell(x^\star;\xi))>0VarP0​​(ℓ(x⋆;ξ))>0:

P∗ ⁣(Topt(P0)∈Cn,ρ)⟶P(χ12≤ρ),ρ≥0.P^*\!\left(T_{\rm opt}(P_0)\in C_{n,\rho}\right)\longrightarrow P(\chi_1^2\le\rho),\qquad \rho\ge0.P∗(Topt​(P0​)∈Cn,ρ​)⟶P(χ12​≤ρ),ρ≥0.

Here P∗P^*P∗ denotes outer probability, and χ12\chi_1^2χ12​ is the square of a standard normal variable. The milestone statements follow the paper's path to this theorem. Lemma 17 gives the directional derivative of an optimal-value functional. Lemma 13 bounds feasible empirical weights relative to uniform weights. Lemma 16 makes the nonlinear remainder uniformly negligible on the divergence ball. The display after (37) then gives a first-order expansion of the upper endpoint of Cn,ρC_{n,\rho}Cn,ρ​; the next display gives its one-sided Gaussian coverage limit. The goal concerns membership in the image set Cn,ρC_{n,\rho}Cn,ρ​, including both sides of that interval.

What the result provides

The limit specifies a radius through a one degree of freedom chi square quantile. It applies to the value of a constrained stochastic optimization problem without requiring the optimizer or the loss to be differentiable. The positive variance condition ensures that the influence function supplies a genuine Gaussian scale. Without such a condition, a deterministic optimal loss can make coverage identically one, so the stated chi square limit would fail. The general theorem in the paper explicitly requires positive influence variance; this mission makes the condition visible in the specialized optimal-value statement.

A complete formalization would connect finite-sample divergence geometry to an asymptotic confidence claim about an optimization functional. The empirical mean and variance definitions, divergence ball, and normalized generator already exist as reusable declarations. This mission adds the optimal-value functional, its influence function, the nonlinear remainder, and the statistical limits. Those definitions can also support later confidence statements for other stochastic optimization models. The result is proved in the source paper; the Lean statements here are open targets awaiting proofs.

The mathematical obstacle

Pointwise control of each loss ℓ(x;ξ)\ell(x;\xi)ℓ(x;ξ) is insufficient for the optimal value: the decision minimizing an empirical weighted objective can move with the weights. A pointwise mean expansion therefore does not by itself control the infimum over xxx. The required limit combines uniform control over the loss class with sensitivity of the infimum functional near its population minimizer. The uniform remainder in Lemma 16 is stronger than a statement for the ordinary empirical distribution because it covers every distribution in the shrinking divergence ball. The final event is membership in the image of that ball; bounds on its upper endpoint alone do not establish two-sided coverage.

Formalization scope

Lean represents decisions by EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin d) and assumes a nonempty compact feasible set. Assumption B uses its Euclidean norm. The paper allows any norm in finite dimension; norm equivalence permits this choice after rescaling the Lipschitz coefficient. The population law is the pushforward of the first measurable observation from a probability space. Samples are indexed from zero, so the first nnn observations are indices 0,…,n−10,\ldots,n-10,…,n−1. Independence and identical distribution are explicit hypotheses. Loss measurability is explicit so the population integrals have their intended values. Square integrability and compact Lipschitz control keep the real infima meaningful.

The generator takes values in EReal so a divergence infinite at zero is representable. The ball uses the published probability uncertainty set with radius ρ/n\rho/nρ/n and includes nonnegativity and unit mass. Its weights represent distributions absolutely continuous with respect to the empirical law. With tied observations, equal splitting across copies preserves the induced distribution and does not increase a convex divergence. The upper endpoint is sup⁡pinf⁡x\sup_p\inf_xsupp​infx​; the different minimax expression inf⁡xsup⁡p\inf_x\sup_pinfx​supp​ is not substituted. The chi square target uses the standard Gaussian measure of {z:z2≤ρ}\{z:z^2\le\rho\}{z:z2≤ρ}.

Mathlib measures are outer measures on arbitrary sets, so the probability of a possibly nonmeasurable membership or supremum event is the paper's outer probability. The Lemma 17 milestone expresses a signed measure through its action H(x)H(x)H(x) on the losses, as Appendix C.2 does, and uses positive directional steps. Real suprema and infima are used only where the hypotheses provide nonempty bounded values. The variance hypothesis rules out the trivial deterministic-loss counterexample. Useful contributions include the compactness and continuity facts needed for those extrema, the action-level derivative, empirical process limits, and the final two-sided event argument.

Selected references

  • John C. Duchi, Peter W. Glynn, and Hongseok Namkoong, Statistics of Robust Optimization: A Generalized Empirical Likelihood Approach, arXiv:1610.03425v3, 2018; published in Mathematics of Operations Research 46(3), 2021. arXiv preprint
21 thms1 active userReviewed
Machine LearningOptimizationProbability+1·Captain: mikedeng1

From Predictive to Prescriptive Analytics 1: The k-Nearest-Neighbor Predictive Prescription Is Asymptotically Optimal and ConsistentResearch Paper

Motivation

Operations research has long studied the stochastic problem min⁡z∈ZE[c(z;Y)]\min_{z\in\mathcal Z}\mathbb E[c(z;Y)]minz∈Z​E[c(z;Y)]: choose a decision zzz before an uncertain quantity YYY (demand, prices, returns) is revealed. In practice the decision maker also observes covariates XXX before deciding (web-search volume before stocking a product, weather before routing a shipment) and should solve the conditional problem instead. Bertsimas and Kallus (arXiv:1402.5481v4; Management Science 66(3), 2020) proposed predictive prescriptions: reweight historical observations (xi,yi)(x^i,y^i)(xi,yi) by how relevant they are to the current xxx, using weights borrowed from a nonparametric regression method, and minimize the reweighted sample cost. Their asymptotic theorems guarantee that this procedure converges to the decision that full knowledge of the conditional distribution would give.

The unconditional special case, sample average approximation (SAA) with i.i.d. draws of YYY and no covariate, has a classical consistency theory (Dupačová–Wets 1988; Shapiro 2003). This mission conditions that theory on XXX, with kkk-nearest-neighbour weights.

Setting

Decisions zzz lie in a set Z⊆Rdz\mathcal Z\subseteq\mathbb R^{d_z}Z⊆Rdz​, covariates XXX in X⊆Rdx\mathcal X\subseteq\mathbb R^{d_x}X⊆Rdx​, uncertainty YYY in Y⊆Rdy\mathcal Y\subseteq\mathbb R^{d_y}Y⊆Rdy​; all three spaces carry the Euclidean norm. A cost c(z;y)∈Rc(z;y)\in\mathbb Rc(z;y)∈R is given. Let μ\muμ be the joint law of (X,Y)(X,Y)(X,Y), μX\mu_XμX​ the law of XXX and μY∣x\mu_{Y|x}μY∣x​ the conditional law of YYY given X=xX=xX=x. The conditional cost and the full-information problem (2) are

C(z∣x)=E[c(z;Y)∣X=x],v∗(x)=min⁡z∈ZC(z∣x),Z∗(x)=arg⁡min⁡z∈ZC(z∣x).C(z\mid x)=\mathbb E\big[c(z;Y)\mid X=x\big],\qquad v^*(x)=\min_{z\in\mathcal Z}C(z\mid x),\qquad \mathcal Z^*(x)=\arg\min_{z\in\mathcal Z}C(z\mid x).C(z∣x)=E[c(z;Y)∣X=x],v∗(x)=z∈Zmin​C(z∣x),Z∗(x)=argz∈Zmin​C(z∣x).

The data are SN={(x1,y1),…,(xN,yN)}S_N=\{(x^1,y^1),\dots,(x^N,y^N)\}SN​={(x1,y1),…,(xN,yN)}, the first NNN terms of an i.i.d. sequence with law μ\muμ. The kNN weights (12) are wN,i(x)=1kI[xiw_{N,i}(x)=\frac1k\mathbb I[x^iwN,i​(x)=k1​I[xi is one of the kkk nearest neighbours of xxx among x1,…,xN]x^1,\dots,x^N]x1,…,xN], with ties among equidistant points broken by lower index first. The predictive prescription (3) is any

z^N(x)∈arg⁡min⁡z∈Z C^N(z∣x),C^N(z∣x)=∑i=1NwN,i(x) c(z;yi).\hat z_N(x)\in\arg\min_{z\in\mathcal Z}\ \widehat C_N(z\mid x),\qquad \widehat C_N(z\mid x)=\sum_{i=1}^N w_{N,i}(x)\,c(z;y^i).z^N​(x)∈argz∈Zmin​ CN​(z∣x),CN​(z∣x)=i=1∑N​wN,i​(x)c(z;yi).

The paper's standing assumptions: Assumption 3 (E∣c(z;Y)∣<∞\mathbb E|c(z;Y)|<\inftyE∣c(z;Y)∣<∞ for every z∈Zz\in\mathcal Zz∈Z, and Z∗(x)≠∅\mathcal Z^*(x)\ne\emptysetZ∗(x)=∅ for a.e. xxx); Assumption 4 (c(z;y)c(z;y)c(z;y) is equicontinuous in zzz, uniformly over y∈Yy\in\mathcal Yy∈Y); Assumption 5 (Z\mathcal ZZ closed and nonempty, and either bounded, or ccc is bounded below for large ∥z∥\|z\|∥z∥ and for each xxx there is a set DxD_xDx​ of positive conditional probability on which c(z;y)→∞c(z;y)\to\inftyc(z;y)→∞ uniformly as ∥z∥→∞\|z\|\to\infty∥z∥→∞).

Definition 1. z^N\hat z_Nz^N​ is asymptotically optimal if, with probability 1, for μX\mu_XμX​-a.e. xxx, C(z^N(x)∣x)→v∗(x)C(\hat z_N(x)\mid x)\to v^*(x)C(z^N​(x)∣x)→v∗(x); it is consistent if, with probability 1, for μX\mu_XμX​-a.e. xxx, inf⁡z∈Z∗(x)∥z^N(x)−z∥→0\inf_{z\in\mathcal Z^*(x)}\|\hat z_N(x)-z\|\to0infz∈Z∗(x)​∥z^N​(x)−z∥→0.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 5 (kNN), p. 19 (= Theorem 15, p. 43)

Under Assumptions 3, 4, 5 and i.i.d. sampling, with k=min⁡{⌈CNδ⌉,N−1}k=\min\{\lceil CN^\delta\rceil,N-1\}k=min{⌈CNδ⌉,N−1}, C>0C>0C>0, 0<δ<10<\delta<10<δ<1: with probability 1, for μX\mu_XμX​-a.e. xxx, Z∗(x)\mathcal Z^*(x)Z∗(x) is nonempty, the argmin is eventually nonempty, and every selection z^N(x)\hat z_N(x)z^N​(x) from it satisfies

lim⁡N→∞C(z^N(x)∣x)=v∗(x)andlim⁡N→∞inf⁡z∈Z∗(x)∥z^N(x)−z∥=0.\lim_{N\to\infty}C(\hat z_N(x)\mid x)=v^*(x)\qquad\text{and}\qquad\lim_{N\to\infty}\inf_{z\in\mathcal Z^*(x)}\|\hat z_N(x)-z\|=0 .N→∞lim​C(z^N​(x)∣x)=v∗(x)andN→∞lim​z∈Z∗(x)inf​∥z^N​(x)−z∥=0.

The goal covers both cases of Assumption 5, including unbounded Z\mathcal ZZ such as the newsvendor's [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞).

Milestones, in the order the proof uses them

  1. Walk step (proof of Theorem 15, p. 47). For any measurable hhh with E∣h(Y)∣<∞\mathbb E|h(Y)|<\inftyE∣h(Y)∣<∞, ∑iwN,i(x)h(yi)→E[h(Y)∣X=x]\sum_i w_{N,i}(x)h(y^i)\to\mathbb E[h(Y)\mid X=x]∑i​wN,i​(x)h(yi)→E[h(Y)∣X=x] a.s., for μX\mu_XμX​-a.e. xxx.
  2. Lemma 7 (p. 47). Fixed-zzz and fixed-DDD almost-sure convergence upgrade to convergence for all z∈Zz\in\mathcal Zz∈Z simultaneously and weak convergence μ^Y∣x,N→μY∣x\hat\mu_{Y|x,N}\to\mu_{Y|x}μ^​Y∣x,N​→μY∣x​, off one null set.
  3. Lemma 5 (p. 45). Along one sample path, pointwise convergence C^N(⋅∣x)→C(⋅∣x)\widehat C_N(\cdot\mid x)\to C(\cdot\mid x)CN​(⋅∣x)→C(⋅∣x) is uniform on compact subsets of Z\mathcal ZZ.
  4. Lemma 6, case 1 (pp. 45–47). For bounded Z\mathcal ZZ, the minima and minimizers of C^N(⋅∣x)\widehat C_N(\cdot\mid x)CN​(⋅∣x) converge to v∗(x)v^*(x)v∗(x) and to Z∗(x)\mathcal Z^*(x)Z∗(x).

Significance

Theorem 5 says that a decision computed from data alone, with no model of the conditional distribution, performs asymptotically as well as the decision a decision maker with full knowledge of μY∣x\mu_{Y|x}μY∣x​ would take, for almost every covariate value and under mild conditions on the cost. It justifies the kNN prescription in the paper's newsvendor and shipment-planning experiments, and its proof skeleton (a pointwise strong law for the weights, then Lemmas 5–7) is reused for kernel, local-linear and recursive-kernel weights (Theorems 6–9), which could follow as missions of the same shape.

The result is proved in the paper; it has not been machine-checked anywhere. Formalizing it requires a strong law for nearest-neighbour regression with integrable responses (Walk 2010, building on Devroye, Györfi, Krzyżak and Lugosi 1994), which Mathlib does not have, and a careful treatment of conditional laws at a point. One of the paper's lemmas (Lemma 6) is false as printed for unbounded Z\mathcal ZZ; the formalization isolates the correct statement.

Difficulty

The deterministic optimization part (Lemmas 5 and 6 for bounded Z\mathcal ZZ) is a compactness argument. The central difficulty is the probabilistic input. A natural first idea, applying the strong law of large numbers to C^N(z∣x)\widehat C_N(z\mid x)CN​(z∣x), fails: the kNN weights depend on all of x1,…,xNx^1,\dots,x^Nx1,…,xN and on xxx, the effective sample size kNk_NkN​ grows sublinearly, and convergence is required for almost every xxx simultaneously, including xxx that are atoms of μX\mu_XμX​ where ties are the rule. A second difficulty is the exchange of quantifiers: the strong law gives a null set depending on zzz and on the set DDD, and the conclusion needs one null set for all z∈Zz\in\mathcal Zz∈Z. Finally, for unbounded Z\mathcal ZZ the minimizers of C^N(⋅∣x)\widehat C_N(\cdot\mid x)CN​(⋅∣x) must be kept bounded, and weak convergence of μ^Y∣x,N\hat\mu_{Y|x,N}μ^​Y∣x,N​ alone does not do so.

Formalization scope

All spaces are EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin d), so kNN distances and ∥z−z′∥\|z-z'\|∥z−z′∥ are Euclidean. The data are a measurable, mutually independent sequence S i : Ω → ℝ^{d_x} × ℝ^{d_y} with each term of law μ\muμ; samples are indexed from 000. The following readings are explicit in the Lean:

  • μY∣x\mu_{Y|x}μY∣x​ is the fixed version μ.condKernel x of the conditional law, and C(z∣x)C(z\mid x)C(z∣x) is its Bochner integral; Assumption 5's "for every x∈Xx\in\mathcal Xx∈X" refers to this version, and DxD_xDx​ is measurable.
  • Quantifier order is "with probability 1, for μX\mu_XμX​-a.e. xxx" (Definition 1), and the selection z^N\hat z_Nz^N​ is quantified inside both a.e. quantifiers: Z∗(x)\mathcal Z^*(x)Z∗(x) is nonempty, the argmin is nonempty for all large NNN, and every sequence lying in it for all large NNN is covered.
  • v∗(x)v^*(x)v∗(x) is never a real infimum; it is read as C(z⋆∣x)C(z^\star\mid x)C(z⋆∣x) for z⋆∈Z∗(x)z^\star\in\mathcal Z^*(x)z⋆∈Z∗(x), nonempty a.e. by Assumption 3.
  • Ties are broken lower-index-first, so the weights sum to 111 for N≥2N\ge2N≥2; at N≤1N\le1N≤1 the formula gives k=0k=0k=0 and all weights 000.
  • Lemmas 5–7 assume weights that are eventually nonnegative and sum to 111, the reading of the paper's Eμ^Y∣x,N\mathbb E_{\hat\mu_{Y|x,N}}Eμ^​Y∣x,N​​ notation; weak convergence is tested against bounded continuous functions.
  • Lemma 6 is posed for bounded Z\mathcal ZZ only, without its unused weak-convergence hypothesis; the goal is posed for both cases.

A formalization that replaces the conditional law by an arbitrary kernel unrelated to μ\muμ, takes z^N\hat z_Nz^N​ to be a fixed measurable selection chosen outside the almost-sure quantifier, or reads inf⁡z∈Z∗(x)\inf_{z\in\mathcal Z^*(x)}infz∈Z∗(x)​ on an empty set as 000 without Assumption 3 would trivialize or weaken the result and is ruled out by the statements above.

Needed infrastructure: nearest-neighbour ranks and their combinatorics (Stone's lemma: a point is among the kkk nearest neighbours of at most a bounded number of others), a strong law for kNN regression, portmanteau-type characterizations of weak convergence for weighted empirical measures, and stability of minimizers under locally uniform convergence. The kNN strong law and the stability lemmas are reusable well beyond this mission. Related platform items, credited but not reused (they concern unconditional SAA): SolutionQuality.SRP.prop1_i, SolutionQuality.SRP.prop1_ii, SolutionQuality.SRP.fbar_tendstoUniformlyOn (Bayraksan–Morton 2006) and DupacovaWets.Consistency.consistency_of_measurable_estimates (Dupačová–Wets 1988). Proofs of any milestone, and alternative routes to the goal, are welcome.

Selected references

  • D. Bertsimas, N. Kallus, From Predictive to Prescriptive Analytics, arXiv:1402.5481v4, 2018; Management Science 66(3), 2020. https://arxiv.org/abs/1402.5481v4 , https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.2018.3253
  • H. Walk, Strong laws of large numbers and nonparametric estimation, in Recent Developments in Applied Probability and Statistics, Physica-Verlag, 2010. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-7908-2598-5_8
  • L. Devroye, L. Györfi, A. Krzyżak, G. Lugosi, On the strong universal consistency of nearest neighbor regression function estimates, Annals of Statistics 22(3), 1994. https://doi.org/10.1214/aos/1176325633
  • J. Dupačová, R. Wets, Asymptotic behavior of statistical estimators and of optimal solutions of stochastic optimization problems, Annals of Statistics 16(4), 1988. https://doi.org/10.1214/aos/1176351052
  • A. Shapiro, Monte Carlo sampling methods, in Handbooks in OR & MS 10, 2003. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0927-0507(03)10006-0
6 thms1 active userReviewed
Machine LearningProbabilityStatistics·Captain: mikedeng1

From Predictive to Prescriptive Analytics 2: For Costs in [0, c̄] That Are L-Lipschitz, w.p. ≥ 1 − δ Every Decision Rule in F Costs ≤ Its Empirical Cost + c̄√(log(1/δ)/2N) + L·ℜ_N(F)Research Paper

Motivation

Many operations decisions are made after observing side information: an inventory manager sees weather, search trends and calendar effects before ordering; a supply-chain planner sees market signals before shipping. Bertsimas and Kallus, in From Predictive to Prescriptive Analytics (arXiv:1402.5481v4, Management Science 2020), study how to turn such data into decisions. Besides their local, weight-based prescriptions (the subject of mission 1 of this series), their §8 analyses a second approach: choose a decision rule z(⋅)z(\cdot)z(⋅) from a structured class, such as norm-bounded linear rules, by empirical risk minimization — minimizing the average historical cost of the rule.

The question this mission formalizes is the one any practitioner of that approach must answer: how far can the true expected cost of the chosen rule exceed its in-sample cost? Classical statistical learning answers it with Rademacher complexity (Bartlett and Mendelson, JMLR 2002), but only for real-valued predictors. Operations decisions are vectors (order quantities for several products, shipments to several locations), so the paper extends the theory to multivariate decision rules.

Setting

Covariates xxx take values in a measurable space X\mathcal XX, the uncertain quantity yyy in a measurable space Y\mathcal YY, and decisions zzz in Rd\mathbb R^{d}Rd, unconstrained. Data are an i.i.d. sample SN=((x1,y1),…,(xN,yN))S_N=((x^1,y^1),\dots,(x^N,y^N))SN​=((x1,y1),…,(xN,yN)) from a probability measure μ\muμ on X×Y\mathcal X\times\mathcal YX×Y, and SNx=(x1,…,xN)S_N^x=(x^1,\dots,x^N)SNx​=(x1,…,xN) is its covariate part. A cost c(z;y)c(z;y)c(z;y) is incurred when decision zzz meets outcome yyy. A decision rule is a measurable map z(⋅):X→Rdz(\cdot):\mathcal X\to\mathbb R^dz(⋅):X→Rd; F\mathcal FF is a class of decision rules. Its expected cost is E[c(z(X);Y)]\mathbb E[c(z(X);Y)]E[c(z(X);Y)], and its empirical cost is 1N∑i=1Nc(z(xi);yi)\frac1N\sum_{i=1}^N c(z(x^i);y^i)N1​∑i=1N​c(z(xi);yi), the objective of problem (4).

The empirical multivariate Rademacher complexity of F\mathcal FF (Definition 3) on a sample s1,…,sNs_1,\dots,s_Ns1​,…,sN​ is

R^N(F;SN)=Eσ[2Nsup⁡g∈F∑i=1N∑k=1dσik gk(si)],\widehat{\mathfrak R}_N(\mathcal F;S_N)=\mathbb E_\sigma\Big[\frac2N\sup_{g\in\mathcal F}\sum_{i=1}^N\sum_{k=1}^d\sigma_{ik}\,g_k(s_i)\Big],RN​(F;SN​)=Eσ​[N2​g∈Fsup​i=1∑N​k=1∑d​σik​gk​(si​)],

with σik\sigma_{ik}σik​ independent uniform signs, and the marginal complexity RN(F)\mathfrak R_N(\mathcal F)RN​(F) is its expectation over the sample. For real-valued classes (d=1d=1d=1) these are the usual Rademacher complexities with factor 2/N2/N2/N and no absolute value. Lean notation: empRademacher, margRademacher, expCost, empCost, costClass in PrescAnalytics.ERM.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 13 (out-of-sample guarantees)

If 0≤c(z;y)≤cˉ0\le c(z;y)\le\bar c0≤c(z;y)≤cˉ and ∣c(z;y)−c(z′;y)∣≤L∥z−z′∥∞|c(z;y)-c(z';y)|\le L\|z-z'\|_\infty∣c(z;y)−c(z′;y)∣≤L∥z−z′∥∞​, then for any δ>0\delta>0δ>0 each of the following holds with probability at least 1−δ1-\delta1−δ:

E[c(z(X);Y)]≤1N∑i=1Nc(z(xi);yi)+cˉlog⁡(1/δ)2N+L RN(F)∀z∈F,(26)\mathbb E[c(z(X);Y)]\le\frac1N\sum_{i=1}^N c(z(x^i);y^i)+\bar c\sqrt{\frac{\log(1/\delta)}{2N}}+L\,\mathfrak R_N(\mathcal F)\quad\forall z\in\mathcal F,\tag{26}E[c(z(X);Y)]≤N1​i=1∑N​c(z(xi);yi)+cˉ2Nlog(1/δ)​​+LRN​(F)∀z∈F,(26) E[c(z(X);Y)]≤1N∑i=1Nc(z(xi);yi)+3cˉlog⁡(2/δ)2N+L R^N(F;SNx)∀z∈F.(27)\mathbb E[c(z(X);Y)]\le\frac1N\sum_{i=1}^N c(z(x^i);y^i)+3\bar c\sqrt{\frac{\log(2/\delta)}{2N}}+L\,\widehat{\mathfrak R}_N(\mathcal F;S_N^x)\quad\forall z\in\mathcal F.\tag{27}E[c(z(X);Y)]≤N1​i=1∑N​c(z(xi);yi)+3cˉ2Nlog(2/δ)​​+LRN​(F;SNx​)∀z∈F.(27)

In particular they hold for the empirical risk minimizer. The goal is stated for a general class F\mathcal FF, not only the linear rules (25).

Milestones

  1. Lemma 1 (comparison): for G={(x,y)↦c(f(x);y):f∈F}\mathcal G=\{(x,y)\mapsto c(f(x);y):f\in\mathcal F\}G={(x,y)↦c(f(x);y):f∈F}, R^N(G;SN)≤L R^N(F;SNx)\widehat{\mathfrak R}_N(\mathcal G;S_N)\le L\,\widehat{\mathfrak R}_N(\mathcal F;S_N^x)RN​(G;SN​)≤LRN​(F;SNx​) and RN(G)≤L RN(F)\mathfrak R_N(\mathcal G)\le L\,\mathfrak R_N(\mathcal F)RN​(G)≤LRN​(F).
  2. Theorem 14 (29): for a class G\mathcal GG of functions with values in [0,gˉ][0,\bar g][0,gˉ​], with probability at least 1−δ1-\delta1−δ, Eg≤1N∑ig(ui)+gˉlog⁡(1/δ)/(2N)+RN(G)\mathbb E g\le\frac1N\sum_i g(u^i)+\bar g\sqrt{\log(1/\delta)/(2N)}+\mathfrak R_N(\mathcal G)Eg≤N1​∑i​g(ui)+gˉ​log(1/δ)/(2N)​+RN​(G) for all g∈Gg\in\mathcal Gg∈G.
  3. Theorem 14 (30): the data-dependent version with 3gˉlog⁡(2/δ)/(2N)+R^N(G;SN)3\bar g\sqrt{\log(2/\delta)/(2N)}+\widehat{\mathfrak R}_N(\mathcal G;S_N)3gˉ​log(2/δ)/(2N)​+RN​(G;SN​).

Significance

Theorem 13 says that the quantity empirical risk minimization optimizes is, up to confidence terms that do not depend on the rule, an upper bound on the true expected cost of every rule in the class, uniformly. Bound (27) is computable from data, so it certifies a learned policy without a holdout set. Combined with complexity bounds for norm-restricted linear rules (the paper's Lemmas 2 and 3, not part of this mission), it shows the confidence terms vanish as N→∞N\to\inftyN→∞.

The results are known: (29) and (30) for [0,gˉ][0,\bar g][0,gˉ​]-valued classes are the standard Rademacher bounds (Mohri, Rostamizadeh and Talwalkar, Foundations of Machine Learning, Thm 3.3, after rescaling). What is new in the paper is the ∞\infty∞-norm vector comparison inequality of Lemma 1 with constant 111. None of these statements has a machine-checked proof on the platform. A formal development would supply a reusable symmetrization-plus-McDiarmid pipeline and a vector contraction lemma. Related items posed in this repository are Bartlett–Mendelson's Theorem 8 (RadGauss.RiskBound.theorem_8, with an absolute value in the complexity and constant 8ln⁡(2/δ)/n\sqrt{8\ln(2/\delta)/n}8ln(2/δ)/n​), Maurer's Euclidean vector contraction with constant 2\sqrt22​ (SPOBounds.Margin.maurer_vector_contraction), and the open uniform law HighDimStat.UniformLaws.uniform_law_rademacher_complexity; none is the same statement as a target here.

Difficulty

The uniform bound needs three ingredients: a concentration inequality for the supremum of the deviation over the class (bounded differences), a symmetrization step relating the expected supremum to the Rademacher complexity, and a comparison inequality to pass from the cost class to the decision rules. The scalar contraction principle of Ledoux and Talagrand does not apply directly, since each cost depends on a ddd-dimensional output; applying it coordinatewise loses a factor of ddd, and Euclidean vector contraction loses 2\sqrt22​ and uses the wrong norm. Lemma 1 needs an argument specific to the ∞\infty∞-norm. Measure theory adds its own difficulty: the supremum over an uncountable class must be shown measurable before its expectation or probability means anything.

Formalization scope

Decisions are Fin d → ℝ, whose Lean norm is the ∞\infty∞-norm; X\mathcal XX, Y\mathcal YY are general measurable spaces. Samples are drawn from the product measure Measure.pi (fun _ : Fin N => μ), with N≥1N\ge1N≥1. The following readings are explicit:

  • Each "with probability at least 1−δ1-\delta1−δ, … for all z∈Fz\in\mathcal Fz∈F" is a bound ≤δ\le\delta≤δ on the outer measure of the set of samples where the inequality fails for some zzz; the quantifier over the class is inside the event.
  • Empirical complexities are in EReal (an unbounded class gives +∞+\infty+∞), marginal ones are lower Lebesgue integrals in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞]; 0⋅∞=00\cdot\infty=00⋅∞=0.
  • The paper assumes only sup⁡c≤cˉ\sup c\le\bar csupc≤cˉ (resp. ∣g∣≤gˉ|g|\le\bar g∣g∣≤gˉ​). With that alone (26) and (29) are false — a two-point outcome with a constant rule violates them with probability 1/21/21/2 — so the costs are assumed to take values in [0,cˉ][0,\bar c][0,cˉ], keeping every printed constant.
  • The undefined δ′,δ′′\delta',\delta''δ′,δ′′ are δ\deltaδ (the i.i.d. case of the paper's Theorem 21); the Lipschitz denominator printed as ∥zk−zk′∥∞\|z_k-z'_k\|_\infty∥zk​−zk′​∥∞​ is ∥z−z′∥∞\|z-z'\|_\infty∥z−z′∥∞​.
  • Decision rules and the cost are measurable and the class is pointwise separable (a countable subclass approximates every member pointwise). The paper takes probabilities and expectations of suprema over the class without comment; without such a convention the statement fails for pathological classes.

A trivializing formalization is ruled out: the quantifier over the class sits inside the probability, the complexity has no absolute value and is never a junk 000 for unbounded classes, and the hypotheses are satisfied by a clipped newsvendor cost. Solvers will need McDiarmid's inequality, symmetrization with a ghost sample, and the comparison lemma; each is reusable for any Rademacher-based generalization bound. Formalizations of these tools as separate lemmas are welcome.

Selected references

  • D. Bertsimas, N. Kallus, From Predictive to Prescriptive Analytics, arXiv:1402.5481v4, 2018; Management Science 66(3), 2020. https://arxiv.org/abs/1402.5481 , https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.2018.3253
  • P. L. Bartlett, S. Mendelson, Rademacher and Gaussian Complexities: Risk Bounds and Structural Results, JMLR 3, 2002. https://www.jmlr.org/papers/v3/bartlett02a.html
  • M. Ledoux, M. Talagrand, Probability in Banach Spaces, Springer, 1991. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-642-20212-4
  • M. Mohri, A. Rostamizadeh, A. Talwalkar, Foundations of Machine Learning, 2nd ed., MIT Press, 2018. https://mitpress.mit.edu/9780262039406/
  • A. Maurer, A Vector-Contraction Inequality for Rademacher Complexities, ALT 2016. https://arxiv.org/abs/1605.00251
5 thms1 active userReviewed
Convex OptimizationNumerical AnalysisOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Projected Newton Methods for Optimization Problems with Simple Constraints: The Projected Newton Method Converges Superlinearly to the Minimum of a Convex Function over the Nonnegative OrthantResearch Paper

Motivation

Smooth optimization with nonnegative variables appears when the variables are Lagrange multipliers for inequality constraints or when an objective incorporates an augmented Lagrangian or an exact penalty. Bertsekas studies how to retain a Newton-like convergence rate in this setting while using an iteration that projects a scaled gradient step onto the nonnegative orthant. His 1982 paper also discusses large optimal-control examples, where repeatedly solving a quadratic subproblem may be costly. These are the applications motivating the method, rather than assumptions of the theorem. Bertsekas, 1982.

The paper contrasts a partly diagonal scaling matrix with two other approaches: a fully diagonal projected gradient step, which generally has a linear rate, and a constrained Newton step defined by a quadratic program. The main theoretical question is whether the simpler projected iteration can still identify binding coordinates and converge superlinearly near the solution. The mission covers the nonnegative-orthant method in §2 and its stated convergence results. The paper's later extension to general linear constraints and its computational examples concern different objects. Bertsekas, 1982.

Setting

Fix a dimension n≥1n\ge1n≥1 and a continuously differentiable function f:Rn→Rf:\mathbb R^n\to\mathbb Rf:Rn→R. Problem (1) minimizes f(x)f(x)f(x) over the nonnegative orthant R+n={x:xi≥0 for every i}\mathbb R_+^n=\{x:x^i\ge0\text{ for every }i\}R+n​={x:xi≥0 for every i}. The positive part [z]+[z]^+[z]+ replaces each negative coordinate of zzz by zero. A feasible xxx is critical when every partial derivative ∂if(x)\partial_i f(x)∂i​f(x) is nonnegative and ∂if(x)=0\partial_i f(x)=0∂i​f(x)=0 wherever xi>0x^i>0xi>0. This is the paper's componentwise first-order condition.

For a feasible iterate xkx_kxk​, the binding set is B(xk)={i:xki=0}B(x_k)=\{i:x_k^i=0\}B(xk​)={i:xki​=0}. The paper selects a larger working set Ik+I_k^+Ik+​ using a fixed ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0 and the projected-gradient residual wk=∥xk−[xk−M∇f(xk)]+∥w_k=\|x_k-[x_k-M\nabla f(x_k)]^+\|wk​=∥xk​−[xk​−M∇f(xk​)]+∥, where MMM is fixed, diagonal and positive definite. More precisely, Ik+I_k^+Ik+​ contains the indices with 0≤xki≤min⁡(ε,wk)0\le x_k^i\le\min(\varepsilon,w_k)0≤xki​≤min(ε,wk​) and ∂if(xk)>0\partial_i f(x_k)>0∂i​f(xk​)>0. The matrix DkD_kDk​ is symmetric positive definite and has zero off-diagonal entries in the rows indexed by Ik+I_k^+Ik+​. The projected arc and update are

pk=Dk∇f(xk),xk(a)=[xk−apk]+,xk+1=xk(βmk).p_k=D_k\nabla f(x_k),\qquad x_k(a)=[x_k-a p_k]^+,\qquad x_{k+1}=x_k(\beta^{m_k}).pk​=Dk​∇f(xk​),xk​(a)=[xk​−apk​]+,xk+1​=xk​(βmk​).

Here 0<β<10<\beta<10<β<1, and mkm_kmk​ is the first nonnegative integer passing the paper's two-sum Armijo test (37), with 0<σ<1/20<\sigma<1/20<σ<1/2. One sum uses the scaled gradient outside Ik+I_k^+Ik+​; the other uses the actual projected displacement on Ik+I_k^+Ik+​. These details define the algorithm whose rate is at issue. Bertsekas, 1982, pp. 228–229.

Formalization targets

The first targets establish the fixed-point and descent properties of the projected arc, positivity of the Armijo right-hand side, well-defined step selection, criticality of limit points, and local attraction with finite binding-set identification. Proposition 3 identifies both the working set and the actual binding set:

Ik+=B(xk)=B(x∗)for all sufficiently late k.I_k^+=B(x_k)=B(x^*)\quad\text{for all sufficiently late }k.Ik+​=B(xk​)=B(x∗)for all sufficiently late k.

The goal is Proposition 4. Let fff be convex and C2C^2C2, let x∗x^*x∗ be the unique minimizer on R+n\mathbb R_+^nR+n​ satisfying Assumption (C), and suppose the Hessian quadratic form has uniform positive lower and finite upper bounds on the initial, unrestricted sublevel set. The scaling matrix is Dk=Hk−1D_k=H_k^{-1}Dk​=Hk−1​, where HkH_kHk​ retains Hessian entries except for off-diagonal entries touching Ik+I_k^+Ik+​. Then

xk⟶x∗,∀c>0 ∃K ∀k≥K: ∥xk+1−x∗∥≤c∥xk−x∗∥.x_k\longrightarrow x^*,\qquad \forall c>0\ \exists K\ \forall k\ge K:\ \|x_{k+1}-x^*\|\le c\|x_k-x^*\|.xk​⟶x∗,∀c>0 ∃K ∀k≥K: ∥xk+1​−x∗∥≤c∥xk​−x∗∥.

If the Hessian is Lipschitz in a neighborhood of x∗x^*x∗, the same proposition states an at-least-quadratic error bound: ∥xk+1−x∗∥≤C∥xk−x∗∥2\|x_{k+1}-x^*\|\le C\|x_k-x^*\|^2∥xk+1​−x∗∥≤C∥xk​−x∗∥2 eventually for some C>0C>0C>0. The separate final milestone records the paper's claim that the initial unit trial is eventually accepted. Bertsekas, 1982, pp. 233–236.

Significance

Proposition 4 says that this specific orthant-projected Newton iteration converges to the unique constrained optimum with a superlinear rate under its stated smoothness and curvature conditions. Proposition 3 supplies a distinct finite-identification statement: the working and binding coordinates eventually match those at the optimum. These facts specify the behavior of an algorithm that does not define its direction by solving a quadratic program at every step. The paper proves the preceding propositions and states Proposition 4 with its proof left to the reader, referring to its earlier discussion and standard unconstrained Newton results. Bertsekas, 1982, pp. 234–236.

Formalizing the claims would provide machine-checked statements and, once solved, proofs for the exact projected arc, two-part line search, matrix selection, identification result and rate conclusion. The local mission items are open proof obligations; their compilation checks the definitions and theorem types, not the mathematical claims. The geometry definitions can also support other orthant-constrained algorithms, while the enlarged working set and Armijo rule belong to this paper's method.

Difficulty

A positive definite matrix by itself does not make projection along [x−aD∇f(x)]+[x-aD\nabla f(x)]^+[x−aD∇f(x)]+ a descent move. An off-diagonal coupling can push coordinates against the boundary in a way that defeats the usual unconstrained descent calculation; the paper gives such a situation before Proposition 1. The partly diagonal condition is therefore substantive. A second obstacle is that the exact active set I+(x)I^+(x)I+(x) can jump at a boundary point: iterates approaching that point from the interior need not have the same indexed rows. The enlarged Ik+I_k^+Ik+​ and its dependence on the residual are central to the finite-identification and rate claims. Bertsekas, 1982, pp. 225–229.

Formalization scope

Lean represents Rn\mathbb R^nRn as EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n), with the Euclidean norm and zero-based coordinates. The dimension is positive. gradient and the derivative of gradient represent first and second derivatives; the paper's MMM is diag μ with every μi>0\mu^i>0μi>0. The run predicate includes a feasible initial point and the first acceptable integer mkm_kmk​, and the matrix choices are indexed by iteration. Propositions 1–3 use the paper's explicit admissibility condition. Proposition 4 constructs DkD_kDk​ from HkH_kHk​ and does not assume its invertibility, admissibility, convergence or eventual active-set equality.

Assumption (C) includes local C2C^2C2 smoothness, curvature bounds on directions zero at the binding coordinates, and strict complementarity. A local minimum is required to be feasible as well as locally minimal on the orthant. Limit points use subsequential convergence. Superlinearity uses a uniform eventual error inequality, which also covers an iterate that reaches the solution exactly; a ratio with a zero denominator would distort this case. The paper's Proposition 4 display mistakenly binds a direction to the level set while leaving the Hessian's point free. The formalization states the intended reading: every point in the unrestricted initial level set and every direction satisfy the Hessian bounds. The displayed level set has no x≥0x\ge0x≥0 restriction, so neither does the Lean hypothesis.

A definition that accepts any Armijo exponent or a goal that assumes the eventual identification or convergence conclusion would erase the paper's claim. Contributions can build the matrix and projected-arc lemmas, the convergence and identification proofs, and the final rate proof. The local inverse-Hessian observation before Proposition 4 is discussed in the notes but has no separate milestone until its full local setting can be captured without weakening it.

Selected references

  • Dimitri P. Bertsekas, Projected Newton Methods for Optimization Problems with Simple Constraints, SIAM Journal on Control and Optimization 20(2), 221–246, 1982. DOI: 10.1137/0320018.
9 thms1 active userReviewed
Convex OptimizationOptimizationProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Optimality and Duality Theory for Stochastic Optimization Problems with Nonlinear Dominance Constraints 1: Under Uniform Dominance, Optimal Solutions Have Concave Utility and L∞ MultipliersResearch Paper

Motivation

Stochastic programs often optimize a decision that changes several random outcomes at once. A reference outcome may be acceptable even when no fixed threshold captures its risk: one wants the new outcome to be preferable under every increasing concave assessment of gains. Second order stochastic dominance expresses that comparison. Dentcheva and Ruszczyński study optimization with several such constraints, each imposed on a nonlinear outcome operator, and show how the constraint multipliers can be represented by utility functions rather than scalar penalties (Dentcheva–Ruszczyński, 2004). Their earlier paper, Optimization with stochastic dominance constraints, treats the pure dominance case without the nonlinear decision map; the present result adds decision dependent outcomes, multiple constraints, and split variables. Ogryczak and Ruszczyński's second performance function supplies the stochastic order used here (Ogryczak–Ruszczyński, 2002).

The utility interpretation matters when a modeler wants a certificate explaining why a solution satisfies a risk preference expressed by dominance. The theorem identifies a concave utility for each binding dominance constraint and an essentially bounded multiplier for each comparison between the split outcome and the outcome produced by the decision. The source is a revised April 2003 author manuscript, later published in Mathematical Programming in 2004; the page and equation numbers below follow that manuscript (author manuscript).

Setting

Work on a probability space (Ω,F,P)(\Omega,\mathcal F,P)(Ω,F,P). An integrable random outcome is a measurable real function with finite expected absolute value; L1\mathcal L^1L1 denotes these outcomes, and L∞\mathcal L^\inftyL∞ denotes essentially bounded ones. The decisions lie in a convex set ZZZ inside a separable locally convex Hausdorff real vector space Z\mathcal ZZ. An integrable objective outcome H(z)H(z)H(z) and integrable constraint outcomes Gi(z)G_i(z)Gi​(z) depend continuously in the L1\mathcal L^1L1 norm on zzz. Almost every realized map z↦H(z)(ω)z\mapsto H(z)(\omega)z↦H(z)(ω) and z↦Gi(z)(ω)z\mapsto G_i(z)(\omega)z↦Gi​(z)(ω) is concave and continuous on all of Z\mathcal ZZ. Fixed integrable outcomes YiY_iYi​ serve as references; the iiith comparison is required over a bounded interval [ai,bi][a_i,b_i][ai​,bi​].

For an outcome XXX, its second performance function is the area below its distribution function:

F2(X;η)=∫−∞ηP{X≤ξ} dξ.F_2(X;\eta)=\int_{-\infty}^{\eta}P\{X\le\xi\}\,d\xi.F2​(X;η)=∫−∞η​P{X≤ξ}dξ.

The split program (11)–(14) chooses z∈Zz\in Zz∈Z and X=(X1,…,Xm)∈(L1)mX=(X_1,\ldots,X_m)\in(\mathcal L^1)^mX=(X1​,…,Xm​)∈(L1)m to maximize EH(z)\mathbb E H(z)EH(z), subject to F2(Xi;η)≤F2(Yi;η)F_2(X_i;\eta)\le F_2(Y_i;\eta)F2​(Xi​;η)≤F2​(Yi​;η) for every η∈[ai,bi]\eta\in[a_i,b_i]η∈[ai​,bi​], and Xi≤Gi(z)X_i\le G_i(z)Xi​≤Gi​(z) almost surely. Larger outcomes are preferred, so a dominating XiX_iXi​ has the smaller F2F_2F2​ curve. The split variables expose the dominance and decision coupling as separate constraints (manuscript, pp. 3–4).

The utility cone U1([a,b])\mathcal U_1([a,b])U1​([a,b]) consists of concave nondecreasing functions u:R→Ru:\mathbb R\to\mathbb Ru:R→R that vanish for t≥bt\ge bt≥b and are affine with a nonnegative slope for t≤at\le at≤a. Given uiu_iui​ in these cones and θi∈L∞\theta_i\in\mathcal L^\inftyθi​∈L∞, the Lagrangian is

L(z,X,u,θ)=E ⁣[H(z)+∑i=1m(ui(Xi)−ui(Yi)+θi(Gi(z)−Xi))].L(z,X,u,\theta)=\mathbb E\!\left[H(z)+\sum_{i=1}^m\bigl(u_i(X_i)-u_i(Y_i)+\theta_i(G_i(z)-X_i)\bigr)\right].L(z,X,u,θ)=E[H(z)+i=1∑m​(ui​(Xi​)−ui​(Yi​)+θi​(Gi​(z)−Xi​))].

Uniform dominance means one decision z~∈Z\tilde z\in Zz~∈Z makes every dominance inequality uniformly strict on its interval: for each iii, F2(Yi;η)−F2(Gi(z~);η)F_2(Y_i;\eta)-F_2(G_i(\tilde z);\eta)F2​(Yi​;η)−F2​(Gi​(z~);η) has a positive lower bound over [ai,bi][a_i,b_i][ai​,bi​] (Definition 1, p. 7).

Formalization targets

Utility and bounded multiplier characterization

Theorem 2 is the goal. Under uniform dominance, every optimum (z^,X^)(\hat z,\hat X)(z^,X^) of the split program admits u^i∈U1([ai,bi])\hat u_i\in\mathcal U_1([a_i,b_i])u^i​∈U1​([ai​,bi​]) and nonnegative θ^i∈L∞\hat\theta_i\in\mathcal L^\inftyθ^i​∈L∞ with

L(z^,X^,u^,θ^)=max⁡z∈Z, X∈(L1)mL(z,X,u^,θ^),L(\hat z,\hat X,\hat u,\hat\theta)=\max_{z\in Z,\,X\in(\mathcal L^1)^m}L(z,X,\hat u,\hat\theta),L(z^,X^,u^,θ^)=z∈Z,X∈(L1)mmax​L(z,X,u^,θ^), Eu^i(X^i)=Eu^i(Yi),θ^i(X^i−Gi(z^))=0almost surely.\mathbb E\hat u_i(\hat X_i)=\mathbb E\hat u_i(Y_i),\qquad \hat\theta_i\bigl(\hat X_i-G_i(\hat z)\bigr)=0\quad\text{almost surely}.Eu^i​(X^i​)=Eu^i​(Yi​),θ^i​(X^i​−Gi​(z^))=0almost surely.

Conversely, an attained Lagrangian maximum satisfying the split constraints and these complementarity equations is a primal optimum. The milestone list follows the source's measure multiplier equations (23)–(24), the measure to utility identity (25), Theorem 1's expected concave subgradient characterization, and the converse's weak duality inequality (manuscript, pp. 5, 8–10).

Significance

The result gives a concrete optimality certificate in a program whose constraints compare entire outcome distributions. Each utility multiplier represents the active part of one dominance constraint. Each θi\theta_iθi​ accounts for the almost sure inequality linking a split outcome to the decision. The equalities show exactly where those constraints are complementary, while the Lagrangian maximum compares the proposed solution with all integrable split outcomes. The paper derives a dual problem from the same Lagrangian in its following section (manuscript, p. 11).

The mathematical theorem is proved in the paper. This mission seeks a machine checked version of its definitions, measure identity, subgradient statement, and both directions of Theorem 2. The published second performance definition is reused as a reference; the nonlinear split program and its utility and measure Lagrangians require a development specific to this paper. The 2003 pure dominance mission contains related local drafts, but those items are not published and cannot currently be imported as platform theorems.

Difficulty

The dominance inequality contains a continuum of thresholds for each outcome. A scalar multiplier at one threshold cannot capture the whole constraint, while the dual object for continuous functions on [ai,bi][a_i,b_i][ai​,bi​] is a measure. The split inequality lives in L1\mathcal L^1L1, where the nonnegative cone has empty interior, so an ordinary interior point argument applied to all constraints at once does not match the paper's setting. The source also needs a subgradient of expected concave utility represented by an almost surely selected, essentially bounded random vector; the conclusion is stronger than merely knowing that the expected objective has a deterministic supporting functional (manuscript, pp. 5–9).

Formalization scope

The Lean development keeps the general separable locally convex Hausdorff decision space, the convex set ZZZ, and a finite index type for the mmm dominance constraints. Operators are function representatives with explicit integrability, continuity in L1\mathcal L^1L1, and samplewise concavity and continuity. Almost sure comparisons use the probability measure PPP; the null set for each realization condition precedes the quantifier over decisions. Split outcomes range only over integrable functions, and utility multipliers range over the exact cone U1([ai,bi])\mathcal U_1([a_i,b_i])U1​([ai​,bi​]). The L∞\mathcal L^\inftyL∞ condition includes almost sure strong measurability and essential boundedness. Maxima in Theorems 1 and 2 are attained maxima, expressed by membership and comparison against every competitor, never a real supremum with a default value.

The source prints a strictly positive affine slope in its definition of U1\mathcal U_1U1​, but immediately calls this class a cone and later uses the zero measure. The formalization uses c≥0c\ge0c≥0; with c>0c>0c>0, Theorem 2 is false for a slack dominance constraint. Uniform dominance is expressed as a positive lower bound rather than a real infimum. The measure milestone uses finite nonnegative measures supported on closed intervals, including endpoint atoms. These conditions exclude default zero integrals, an empty interval disguised by an infimum, and a vacuous utility class. Contributions to the measure to utility correspondence, integration identities, and expected concave subgradient infrastructure can be reused beyond this program.

Selected references

  • D. Dentcheva and A. Ruszczyński, Optimality and duality theory for stochastic optimization problems with nonlinear dominance constraints, Mathematical Programming (2004), DOI; revised author manuscript, April 2003.
  • D. Dentcheva and A. Ruszczyński, Optimization with stochastic dominance constraints, manuscript submitted for publication (2002), cited as reference [6] in the 2003 author manuscript.
  • W. Ogryczak and A. Ruszczyński, Dual stochastic dominance and related mean risk models, SIAM Journal on Optimization 13 (2002), DOI.
7 thms1 active userReviewed
Dynamic ProgrammingMarkov Chain·Captain: mikedeng1

Discrete-Time Controlled Markov Processes with Average Cost Criterion: A Survey 2: Uniformly Bounded Mean Return Times Make the Differential Discounted Values Uniformly BoundedResearch Paper

Motivation

Controlled Markov processes with the average cost criterion model systems that run indefinitely, such as queues, inventories, maintenance and communication networks, where only the long-run cost per unit time matters. The standard route to an optimal stationary policy goes through the average cost optimality equation (ACOE). The ACOE is usually obtained by the vanishing discount method: solve the discounted problem for each discount factor β<1\beta<1β<1 and let β→1\beta\to1β→1. The method works only when the differences of discounted values stay bounded as β→1\beta\to1β→1. Conditions that guarantee this are therefore central in the survey of Arapostathis, Borkar, Fernández-Gaucherand, Ghosh and Marcus (SIAM J. Control Optim. 31 (1993), §5).

This mission formalizes one such condition, due to Ross: if the mean return time to a fixed state is bounded uniformly over all stationary policies and initial states, the differential discounted value functions are bounded uniformly in the discount factor and the state.

Timeline. Derman (Management Sci. 9 (1962); survey reference [38]) and Derman–Veinott (Ann. Math. Statist. 38 (1967); survey reference [43]) introduced recurrence conditions of this kind for countable-state processes. Ross (Ann. Math. Statist. 39 (1968), survey reference [147]; Introduction to Stochastic Dynamic Programming, 1983, survey reference [150]) showed, for bounded costs, that under a Derman–Veinott type recurrence condition hβh_\betahβ​ is bounded uniformly in β\betaβ, and obtained a bounded solution of the ACOE by letting β↑1\beta\uparrow1β↑1 (survey, pp. 291 and 301). Later work replaced the condition with weaker ones (survey Assumptions 5.1–5.3) and with Sennott's conditions (survey Theorem 5.9).

Setting

The state space is S={0,1,2,… }S=\{0,1,2,\dots\}S={0,1,2,…}. In each state iii, an action aaa is chosen from a nonempty compact set U(i)U(i)U(i) of a metric space AAA. The one-stage cost c(i,a)c(i,a)c(i,a) is nonnegative and the next state is drawn from the transition law P(⋅∣i,a)P(\cdot\mid i,a)P(⋅∣i,a). For fixed i,ji,ji,j, the maps a↦c(i,a)a\mapsto c(i,a)a↦c(i,a) and a↦P(j∣i,a)a\mapsto P(j\mid i,a)a↦P(j∣i,a) are continuous on U(i)U(i)U(i). A policy π∈Π\pi\in\Piπ∈Π chooses the action at time ttt at random, given the whole history, and must choose from U(Xt)U(X_t)U(Xt​). A stationary deterministic policy f∈ΠSDf\in\Pi_{SD}f∈ΠSD​ is a map f:S→Af:S\to Af:S→A with f(i)∈U(i)f(i)\in U(i)f(i)∈U(i). PiπP^\pi_iPiπ​ and EiπE^\pi_iEiπ​ denote the law and the expectation of the controlled process (Xt,At)(X_t,A_t)(Xt​,At​) started at iii.

For a discount factor β∈(0,1)\beta\in(0,1)β∈(0,1), the discounted cost and the optimal discounted cost are

Jβ(i,π)=Eiπ[∑t=0∞βtc(Xt,At)],Jβ∗(i)=inf⁡π∈ΠJβ(i,π).J_\beta(i,\pi)=E^\pi_i\Big[\sum_{t=0}^\infty\beta^t c(X_t,A_t)\Big],\qquad J^*_\beta(i)=\inf_{\pi\in\Pi}J_\beta(i,\pi).Jβ​(i,π)=Eiπ​[t=0∑∞​βtc(Xt​,At​)],Jβ∗​(i)=π∈Πinf​Jβ​(i,π).

A policy f∈ΠSDf\in\Pi_{SD}f∈ΠSD​ is β\betaβ-discount optimal if Jβ(i,f)=Jβ∗(i)J_\beta(i,f)=J^*_\beta(i)Jβ​(i,f)=Jβ∗​(i) for all iii. The differential discounted value function is

hβ(i)=Jβ∗(i)−Jβ∗(0),h_\beta(i)=J^*_\beta(i)-J^*_\beta(0),hβ​(i)=Jβ∗​(i)−Jβ∗​(0),

measured relative to the fixed state 000. The return time to 000 is

τ=min⁡{t≥1: Xt=0},\tau=\min\{t\ge1:\ X_t=0\},τ=min{t≥1: Xt​=0},

with τ=∞\tau=\inftyτ=∞ if the process never returns. Throughout, as in §5.1 of the survey, the cost is bounded: c(i,a)≤Mc(i,a)\le Mc(i,a)≤M on admissible pairs.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 5.3

If there is a constant K>0K>0K>0 with

Eif[τ]<Kfor all f∈ΠSD, i∈S,(5.7)E^f_i[\tau]<K\qquad\text{for all } f\in\Pi_{SD},\ i\in S, \tag{5.7}Eif​[τ]<Kfor all f∈ΠSD​, i∈S,(5.7)

then there is a constant BBB such that

∣hβ(i)∣≤Bfor all β∈(0,1), i∈S.|h_\beta(i)|\le B\qquad\text{for all }\beta\in(0,1),\ i\in S.∣hβ​(i)∣≤Bfor all β∈(0,1), i∈S.

This is the theorem as printed: it asserts only uniform boundedness and fixes no constant.

Milestones

  1. Theorem 2.1 (iii): for every β∈(0,1)\beta\in(0,1)β∈(0,1), a β\betaβ-discount optimal fβ∈ΠSDf_\beta\in\Pi_{SD}fβ​∈ΠSD​ exists.
  2. (5.8): for such an fβf_\betafβ​, Jβ∗(i)≤M Eifβ[τ]+Jβ∗(0) Eifβ[βτ]J^*_\beta(i)\le M\,E^{f_\beta}_i[\tau]+J^*_\beta(0)\,E^{f_\beta}_i[\beta^\tau]Jβ∗​(i)≤MEifβ​​[τ]+Jβ∗​(0)Eifβ​​[βτ].
  3. (5.9): Jβ∗(i)−βJβ∗(0)≤MKJ^*_\beta(i)-\beta J^*_\beta(0)\le MKJβ∗​(i)−βJβ∗​(0)≤MK.
  4. Jensen step: Jβ∗(i)≥Jβ∗(0) Eifβ[βτ]≥Jβ∗(0) βKJ^*_\beta(i)\ge J^*_\beta(0)\,E^{f_\beta}_i[\beta^\tau]\ge J^*_\beta(0)\,\beta^KJβ∗​(i)≥Jβ∗​(0)Eifβ​​[βτ]≥Jβ∗​(0)βK.
  5. (5.10): Jβ∗(0)−Jβ∗(i)≤(1−βK)Jβ∗(0)≤(1−βK)M1−β≤MKJ^*_\beta(0)-J^*_\beta(i)\le(1-\beta^K)J^*_\beta(0)\le(1-\beta^K)\frac{M}{1-\beta}\le MKJβ∗​(0)−Jβ∗​(i)≤(1−βK)Jβ∗​(0)≤(1−βK)1−βM​≤MK.
  6. Explicit bound: ∣hβ(i)∣≤MK|h_\beta(i)|\le MK∣hβ​(i)∣≤MK. This is stronger than the goal and is the constant the survey's argument yields.

Significance

The result. Theorem 5.3 verifies the hypothesis of the vanishing discount theorem (Theorem 5.2 of the survey) from a condition on the uncontrolled dynamics of stationary policies. Theorem 5.2 then gives a bounded solution (ρ,h)(\rho,h)(ρ,h) of the ACOE, an average optimal stationary policy, and the limit lim⁡β→1(1−β)Jβ∗(i)=ρ\lim_{\beta\to1}(1-\beta)J^*_\beta(i)=\rholimβ→1​(1−β)Jβ∗​(i)=ρ. Mean return times can often be estimated directly, for instance through Foster–Lyapunov drift arguments on queues, which makes (5.7) checkable in applications. The explicit bound MKMKMK also controls the span of the relative value function.

Formalizing it. The result is proved in the literature; to our knowledge it has not been machine-checked. A formal proof needs discounted dynamic programming on a countable state space with compact action sets, the existence of optimal stationary policies (Theorem 2.1 (iii), which the survey cites without proof), and the strong Markov property of the controlled chain at a return time. All of these are reusable well beyond this mission.

Difficulty

The estimates (5.9) and (5.10) are elementary once (5.8) and the existence of fβf_\betafβ​ are available. The weight lies elsewhere.

  • Optimal stationary policies. The infimum defining Jβ∗J^*_\betaJβ∗​ ranges over all history-dependent randomized policies. Bringing it down to a single stationary deterministic policy requires the discounted optimality equation, a measurable selection of minimizers on compact action sets, and a verification argument against arbitrary policies.
  • Restarting at τ\tauτ. (5.8) splits the discounted cost at the random time τ\tauτ. The tail must be identified with βτ\beta^\tauβτ times the discounted cost from state 000. This is the strong Markov property for the process built by the Ionescu-Tulcea theorem, applied at a stopping time that may be infinite.

Formalization scope

  • The state space is ℕ; the action space is a metric space with its Borel σ\sigmaσ-algebra. The model CMP carries compact nonempty U(i)U(i)U(i), a nonnegative measurable cost, and continuity of c(i,⋅)c(i,\cdot)c(i,⋅) and P(j∣i,⋅)P(j\mid i,\cdot)P(j∣i,⋅) on U(i)U(i)U(i), the standing assumptions of §5.
  • Policies are history-dependent, randomized and admissible. The path measure is Mathlib's Kernel.trajMeasure. Jβ∗J^*_\betaJβ∗​ is an infimum over all such policies, not over Markov or stationary policies only.
  • Costs are lower Lebesgue integrals in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞]. hβh_\betahβ​ is the difference of the real parts of Jβ∗(i)J^*_\beta(i)Jβ∗​(i) and Jβ∗(0)J^*_\beta(0)Jβ∗​(0). This is exact here because bounded cost gives Jβ∗≤M/(1−β)<∞J^*_\beta\le M/(1-\beta)<\inftyJβ∗​≤M/(1−β)<∞.
  • Explicit choices:
    • The bounded-cost hypothesis c≤Mc\le Mc≤M on admissible pairs is a binder of every §5.1 statement. It is the section's standing assumption, and without it the theorem is false.
    • τ\tauτ counts from t≥1t\ge1t≥1 and takes values in N∪{∞}\mathbb N\cup\{\infty\}N∪{∞}, so (5.7) applies from i=0i=0i=0 and forces τ<∞\tau<\inftyτ<∞ almost surely; βτ=0\beta^\tau=0βτ=0 on {τ=∞}\{\tau=\infty\}{τ=∞}.
    • The typo βn\beta^nβn in (5.8) is read as βt\beta^tβt.
    • K≥1K\ge1K≥1 in (5.10) is not assumed; it follows from (5.7).
  • Theorem 2.1 is stated in the survey for Borel models under Assumptions 2.1–2.3. Here it is posed in the countable model, where those assumptions follow from the §5 continuity and compactness assumptions.
  • The goal's bound BBB is quantified before β\betaβ and iii. A per-β\betaβ or per-state bound would be trivial, since every hβ(i)h_\beta(i)hβ​(i) is a finite number.
  • Welcome contributions include discounted dynamic programming on countable state spaces, the strong Markov property for trajMeasure, and return-time estimates.

Selected references

  • A. Arapostathis, V. S. Borkar, E. Fernández-Gaucherand, M. K. Ghosh, S. I. Marcus, Discrete-time controlled Markov processes with average cost criterion: a survey, SIAM J. Control Optim. 31(2) (1993) 282–344. https://doi.org/10.1137/0331018
  • C. Derman, On sequential decisions and Markov chains, Management Sci. 9 (1962) 16–24. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.9.1.16
  • C. Derman, A. F. Veinott Jr., A solution to a countable system of equations arising in Markovian decision processes, Ann. Math. Statist. 38 (1967) 582–584 (cited as [43] in the survey, https://doi.org/10.1137/0331018).
  • S. M. Ross, Non-discounted denumerable Markovian decision models, Ann. Math. Statist. 39 (1968) 412–423 (cited as [147] in the survey, https://doi.org/10.1137/0331018).
  • S. M. Ross, Introduction to Stochastic Dynamic Programming, Academic Press, 1983 (cited as [150] in the survey, https://doi.org/10.1137/0331018).
10 thms1 active userReviewed
Dynamic ProgrammingMarkov Chain·Captain: mikedeng1

Discrete-Time Controlled Markov Processes with Average Cost Criterion: A Survey 3: A Uniform Lower Bound on the Probability of Moving to State 0 Reduces Average Cost to Discounted CostResearch Paper

Why average cost is a control problem

A controller acting over an indefinite horizon must decide whether a lower cost today is worth a higher cost later. Average cost measures the expected expenditure per stage as the horizon grows. It is appropriate when operation has no natural terminal date, but its limiting definition makes it difficult to compute an optimal policy directly. Discounted cost assigns less weight to distant stages and has a more direct optimality equation. Arapostathis, Borkar, Fernández-Gaucherand, Ghosh and Marcus survey these criteria for controlled Markov processes and state a condition under which solving one discounted problem yields a solution to an average-cost problem (Arapostathis et al., 1993, §5.1).

The condition is a common lower bound on the one-step probability of moving to a distinguished state. Ross's reduction, reported as Theorem 5.6 of the survey, uses that bound to define a new transition law and a specific discount factor. The survey's theorem states the reduction informally; its proof specifies the transformed law, the optimality equation and the resulting average-cost policy. Those claims are the targets of this mission (Arapostathis et al., 1993, pp. 303–304).

Controlled process and criteria

The state space is S={0,1,2,…}S=\{0,1,2,\ldots\}S={0,1,2,…}. In state iii, the controller may choose an action aaa from a nonempty compact set U(i)U(i)U(i) in a metric action space. Choosing aaa incurs the one-stage cost c(i,a)≥0c(i,a)\ge0c(i,a)≥0 and moves the state to jjj with probability P(j∣i,a)P(j\mid i,a)P(j∣i,a). The cost is measurable, and for each fixed i,ji,ji,j its value and P(j∣i,a)P(j\mid i,a)P(j∣i,a) vary continuously with aaa on U(i)U(i)U(i). Section 5 imposes these state and continuity conventions; §5.1 additionally assumes the costs are bounded (Arapostathis et al., 1993, pp. 284–288, 299, 301).

An admissible policy π\piπ chooses a probability law for the next action from the entire observed history, and assigns probability one to admissible actions. A stationary deterministic policy is a map fff with f(i)∈U(i)f(i)\in U(i)f(i)∈U(i); it always takes action f(i)f(i)f(i) in state iii. These are distinct classes. Let JN(i,π)J_N(i,\pi)JN​(i,π) be expected cost over the first NNN stages from iii, and let Jβ(i,π)J_\beta(i,\pi)Jβ​(i,π) be expected cost when stage ttt is weighted by βt\beta^tβt, where 0<β<10<\beta<10<β<1. The average-cost criterion is J(i,π)=lim sup⁡N→∞JN(i,π)/NJ(i,\pi)=\limsup_{N\to\infty}J_N(i,\pi)/NJ(i,π)=limsupN→∞​JN​(i,π)/N. The optimal values J∗(i)J^*(i)J∗(i) and Jβ∗(i)J_\beta^*(i)Jβ∗​(i) are infima over all admissible policies, including randomized and history-dependent ones (Arapostathis et al., 1993, pp. 285–287).

The average cost optimality equation, or ACOE, asks for a scalar ρ\rhoρ and a real function hhh such that, for each state iii,

ρ+h(i)=min⁡a∈U(i){c(i,a)+∑j∈SP(j∣i,a)h(j)}.\rho+h(i)=\min_{a\in U(i)}\left\{c(i,a)+\sum_{j\in S}P(j\mid i,a)h(j)\right\}.ρ+h(i)=a∈U(i)min​⎩⎨⎧​c(i,a)+j∈S∑​P(j∣i,a)h(j)⎭⎬⎫​.

The minimum is attained. The survey's verification theorem identifies ρ\rhoρ with the optimal average cost when the terminal contribution of h(Xt)h(X_t)h(Xt​) vanishes after division by ttt (Arapostathis et al., 1993, p. 299, (5.1), Theorem 5.1).

Formalization targets

The reduction

Assume that P(0∣i,a)≥αP(0\mid i,a)\ge\alphaP(0∣i,a)≥α on every admissible state-action pair for a single constant 0<α<10<\alpha<10<α<1. The transformed process M~\widetilde MM has the same admissible actions and costs and has transition probabilities

P~(j∣i,a)=P(j∣i,a)−α1{j=0}1−α.\widetilde P(j\mid i,a)=\frac{P(j\mid i,a)-\alpha\mathbf1_{\{j=0\}}}{1-\alpha}.P(j∣i,a)=1−αP(j∣i,a)−α1{j=0}​​.

Write J~1−α∗\widetilde J^*_{1-\alpha}J1−α∗​ for its discounted value at discount factor 1−α1-\alpha1−α. The goal states that this value is finite, a stationary deterministic discounted-optimal policy exists, and every such policy is average-cost optimal for the original process. It also identifies a constant optimal average cost for every initial state:

J∗(i)=αJ~1−α∗(0),i∈S.J^*(i)=\alpha\widetilde J^*_{1-\alpha}(0),\qquad i\in S.J∗(i)=αJ1−α∗​(0),i∈S.

The goal does not assume the average optimality that it asserts. It requires the transformed law to satisfy the displayed formula at every admissible state-action pair (Arapostathis et al., 1993, Theorem 5.6 and proof, pp. 303–304).

Supporting targets

The milestones establish that the transformed law gives a controlled Markov process, that the discounted problem has an optimal stationary deterministic policy, and that the transformed discounted value satisfies the original ACOE with ρ=αJ~1−α∗(0)\rho=\alpha\widetilde J^*_{1-\alpha}(0)ρ=αJ1−α∗​(0). The final milestone is the ACOE verification theorem needed to identify the average cost. The source gives the first two discounted claims through Theorem 2.1 and writes out the transformed equation in the proof of Theorem 5.6 (Arapostathis et al., 1993, pp. 289, 299, 304).

What the result supplies

The theorem replaces an average-cost optimization problem by one discounted problem with a prescribed discount factor and transition law. It yields a stationary deterministic policy that is optimal even when compared with every history-dependent randomized policy, and it shows that the optimal average cost is independent of the initial state. Without the common return probability, neither this particular law nor this fixed discount factor follows from the survey's argument (Arapostathis et al., 1993, Theorem 5.6).

The survey reports this as a known result of Ross rather than an open conjecture. The formalization work is to give the path measures, value functions, transformed process and verification result machine-checkable meanings. The Lean declarations here are open theorem statements awaiting proofs; compiling a statement with sorry does not establish the mathematical theorem. The policy and cost definitions can also support the other countable-state missions drawn from §5.

Difficulty

The transformed probabilities have to form a measurable stochastic kernel, preserve the action continuity assumptions and yield a controlled process with the original feasible actions and costs. The discounted value must be finite and uniformly bounded before its real form can enter the ACOE. A simple comparison of numerical optimal values is insufficient: a policy chosen in the transformed model must be shown optimal for the original model against the full policy class. The verification theorem also requires control of the terminal expectation of h(Xt)h(X_t)h(Xt​) for arbitrary admissible policies, rather than only the stationary policies named in its printed condition (Arapostathis et al., 1993, pp. 299–300, 304).

Formalization scope

Lean uses N\mathbb NN for the countable state space and Mathlib probability kernels for the transition and randomized decision rules. Strategic path measures are constructed from those kernels. Nonnegative expected costs and their infima live in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞], so an unbounded integral cannot silently become a finite real value. The transformed discounted value is converted to a real only in conclusions that also assert its finiteness. The ACOE uses real sums with explicit summability and an attained minimum. The model requires a Borel metric action space, nonempty compact action sets, measurable costs, and coordinatewise action continuity of the transition probabilities.

The source's §5.1 bounded-cost assumption is explicit in the goal and its discounted milestones. The displayed transformation needs α<1\alpha<1α<1; the paper's theorem sentence gives only α>0\alpha>0α>0, so the case α=1\alpha=1α=1 is excluded from this version. The paper prints (5.2) for stationary deterministic policies, but the proof uses it for all admissible policies to compare with J∗J^*J∗; the verification milestone takes the stronger, proof-supported hypothesis. Expectations in that condition are explicitly integrable. The converse part of Theorem 5.1 is not used and is outside this mission.

The transformed process is represented by another CMP constrained to have exactly the source's action sets, admissible costs and transition formula. A milestone poses its existence. This representation keeps the definition layer free of an unproved stochastic-kernel construction. The discount-optimal policy conclusion ranges over every stationary deterministic policy attaining the transformed discounted value, while the values themselves take infima over all admissible policies. Definitions of admissible path laws and the verification theorem are reusable contributions; proofs of the transformed kernel, stationary discounted existence and ACOE identity are welcome.

Selected references

  • A. Arapostathis, V. S. Borkar, E. Fernández-Gaucherand, M. K. Ghosh and S. I. Marcus, Discrete-time controlled Markov processes with average cost criterion: a survey, SIAM Journal on Control and Optimization 31(2), 282–344, 1993. DOI: 10.1137/0331018.
7 thms1 active userReviewed
ProbabilityStatistics·Captain: mikedeng1

Assessing Solution Quality in Stochastic Programs: The Single-Replication Confidence Interval on the Optimality Gap Is Asymptotically ValidResearch Paper

Motivation

Most stochastic programs of practical size, such as two-stage recourse models in energy, finance or supply-chain planning, cannot be solved exactly: the expectation in the objective is a high-dimensional integral. The standard remedy is sample average approximation (SAA): replace the expectation by an average over a Monte Carlo sample and solve the resulting deterministic problem. This produces a candidate solution x^\hat xx^ but says nothing about how good it is. A decision maker needs a statistical certificate: an interval that contains the candidate's optimality gap with a prescribed probability.

Mak, Morton and Wood (Oper. Res. Lett. 24, 1999) built such a certificate from ng≥30n_g\ge 30ng​≥30 independent SAA replications, which requires solving at least 30 optimization problems. Bayraksan and Morton (preprint January 2005, published in Math. Program. 108, 2006) showed that a single replication suffices asymptotically, and gave two variants that use two replications. This mission formalizes their validity theorems.

Setting

Let ξ~\tilde\xiξ~​ be a random vector with distribution μ\muμ on a measurable space Ξ\XiΞ, let X⊆RdX\subseteq\mathbb R^dX⊆Rd be a set of decisions, and let f:Rd×Ξ→Rf:\mathbb R^d\times\Xi\to\mathbb Rf:Rd×Ξ→R be a cost. The stochastic program is

z∗=min⁡x∈XEf(x,ξ~).(SP)z^*=\min_{x\in X} Ef(x,\tilde\xi). \qquad\text{(SP)}z∗=x∈Xmin​Ef(x,ξ~​).(SP)

Its optimal set is X∗X^*X∗, and the optimality gap of a candidate x^∈X\hat x\in Xx^∈X is μx^=Ef(x^,ξ~)−z∗≥0\mu_{\hat x}=Ef(\hat x,\tilde\xi)-z^*\ge 0μx^​=Ef(x^,ξ~​)−z∗≥0. The paper assumes throughout:

  • (A1) f(⋅,ξ~)f(\cdot,\tilde\xi)f(⋅,ξ~​) is continuous on XXX, with probability one;
  • (A2) Esup⁡x∈Xf2(x,ξ~)<∞E\sup_{x\in X} f^2(x,\tilde\xi)<\inftyEsupx∈X​f2(x,ξ~​)<∞;
  • (A3) XXX is nonempty and compact.

Let ξ~1,ξ~2,…\tilde\xi^1,\tilde\xi^2,\dotsξ~​1,ξ~​2,… be i.i.d. copies of ξ~\tilde\xiξ~​, and write fˉn(x)=1n∑i=1nf(x,ξ~i)\bar f_n(x)=\frac1n\sum_{i=1}^n f(x,\tilde\xi^i)fˉ​n​(x)=n1​∑i=1n​f(x,ξ~​i). The SAA problem is zn∗=min⁡x∈Xfˉn(x)z_n^*=\min_{x\in X}\bar f_n(x)zn∗​=minx∈X​fˉ​n​(x) (SPn_nn​), with an optimal solution xn∗x_n^*xn∗​. The gap estimator is Gn(x^)=fˉn(x^)−zn∗G_n(\hat x)=\bar f_n(\hat x)-z_n^*Gn​(x^)=fˉ​n​(x^)−zn∗​ (display (2)), and the sample variance of the differences f(x^,ξ~i)−f(x,ξ~i)f(\hat x,\tilde\xi^i)-f(x,\tilde\xi^i)f(x^,ξ~​i)−f(x,ξ~​i) is

sn2(x)=1n−1∑i=1n[(f(x^,ξ~i)−f(x,ξ~i))−(fˉn(x^)−fˉn(x))]2,s_n^2(x)=\frac1{n-1}\sum_{i=1}^n\Big[\big(f(\hat x,\tilde\xi^i)-f(x,\tilde\xi^i)\big)-\big(\bar f_n(\hat x)-\bar f_n(x)\big)\Big]^2,sn2​(x)=n−11​i=1∑n​[(f(x^,ξ~​i)−f(x,ξ~​i))−(fˉ​n​(x^)−fˉ​n​(x))]2,

with population counterpart σx^2(x)=var⁡[f(x^,ξ~)−f(x,ξ~)]\sigma^2_{\hat x}(x)=\operatorname{var}[f(\hat x,\tilde\xi)-f(x,\tilde\xi)]σx^2​(x)=var[f(x^,ξ~​)−f(x,ξ~​)]. Finally zαz_\alphazα​ is defined by P(N(0,1)≤zα)=1−αP(N(0,1)\le z_\alpha)=1-\alphaP(N(0,1)≤zα​)=1−α.

The single replication procedure (SRP) solves (SPn_nn​) once and reports the one-sided interval [0, Gn(x^)+zαsn(xn∗)/n]\big[0,\ G_n(\hat x)+z_\alpha s_n(x_n^*)/\sqrt n\big][0, Gn​(x^)+zα​sn​(xn∗​)/n​] (display (5)). The I2RP takes the variance from a second, independent sample ξ~n+1,…,ξ~2n\tilde\xi^{n+1},\dots,\tilde\xi^{2n}ξ~​n+1,…,ξ~​2n and its own minimizer xn2∗x_n^{2*}xn2∗​. The A2RP runs the SRP on both halves of a sample of size 2n2n2n, averages the gaps and the variances as in (10), and scales by 2n\sqrt{2n}2n​.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2 (p. 7)

Under (A1)–(A3), for x^∈X\hat x\in Xx^∈X and 0<α<10<\alpha<10<α<1, provided α≤1/2\alpha\le1/2α≤1/2 or σx^2(xmax⁡∗)>0\sigma^2_{\hat x}(x^*_{\max})>0σx^2​(xmax∗​)>0 (see Formalization scope),

lim inf⁡n→∞P(μx^≤Gn(x^)+zαsn(xn∗)n)≥1−α.(6)\liminf_{n\to\infty}P\left(\mu_{\hat x}\le G_n(\hat x)+\frac{z_\alpha s_n(x_n^*)}{\sqrt n}\right)\ge 1-\alpha. \qquad(6)n→∞liminf​P(μx^​≤Gn​(x^)+n​zα​sn​(xn∗​)​)≥1−α.(6)

Consistency (Proposition 1, p. 6)

The milestones follow the paper's own proof:

  1. the uniform strong law sup⁡x∈X∣fˉn(x)−Ef(x,ξ~)∣→0\sup_{x\in X}|\bar f_n(x)-Ef(x,\tilde\xi)|\to 0supx∈X​∣fˉ​n​(x)−Ef(x,ξ~​)∣→0 w.p.1;
  2. (i) zn∗→z∗z_n^*\to z^*zn∗​→z∗ w.p.1;
  3. (ii) every limit point of {xn∗}\{x_n^*\}{xn∗​} lies in X∗X^*X∗ w.p.1;
  4. the uniform convergence sn2→σx^2s_n^2\to\sigma^2_{\hat x}sn2​→σx^2​ on XXX w.p.1;
  5. (iii) σx^2(xmin⁡∗)≤lim inf⁡nsn2(xn∗)≤lim sup⁡nsn2(xn∗)≤σx^2(xmax⁡∗)\sigma^2_{\hat x}(x^*_{\min})\le\liminf_n s_n^2(x_n^*)\le\limsup_n s_n^2(x_n^*)\le\sigma^2_{\hat x}(x^*_{\max})σx^2​(xmin∗​)≤liminfn​sn2​(xn∗​)≤limsupn​sn2​(xn∗​)≤σx^2​(xmax∗​) w.p.1, where xmin⁡∗x^*_{\min}xmin∗​ and xmax⁡∗x^*_{\max}xmax∗​ minimize and maximize σx^2\sigma^2_{\hat x}σx^2​ over X∗X^*X∗;
  6. the ε\varepsilonε-bound of the proof of Theorem 2: if α≤1/2\alpha\le 1/2α≤1/2 and σx^2(xmin⁡∗)>0\sigma^2_{\hat x}(x^*_{\min})>0σx^2​(xmin∗​)>0, then for 0<ε<10<\varepsilon<10<ε<1 the liminf in (6) is at least Φ((1−ε)zα)\Phi((1-\varepsilon)z_\alpha)Φ((1−ε)zα​).

Companions

Theorem 3 (p. 9) and Theorem 4 (p. 10) are the same coverage statement for the I2RP and the A2RP. Three further statements are included: the negative bias Ezn∗≤z∗Ez_n^*\le z^*Ezn∗​≤z∗ of display (1), the pathwise bound Gn(x^)≥fˉn(x^)−fˉn(x)G_n(\hat x)\ge\bar f_n(\hat x)-\bar f_n(x)Gn​(x^)≥fˉ​n​(x^)−fˉ​n​(x) for x∈Xx\in Xx∈X, and the consistency lim inf⁡nsn′2≥σx^2(xmin⁡∗)\liminf_n s_n'^2\ge\sigma^2_{\hat x}(x^*_{\min})liminfn​sn′2​≥σx^2​(xmin∗​) of the pooled variance.

Significance

Theorem 2 makes a single SAA solve enough for an asymptotically valid upper confidence bound on the optimality gap. It cuts the computational cost of the multiple-replication procedure by a factor of about thirty, and it needs no asymptotic normality of Gn(x^)G_n(\hat x)Gn​(x^), which typically fails when (SP) has several optimal solutions. The two-replication variants lessen the small-sample under-coverage of the SRP. The single- and two-replication estimators were later reused in sequential sampling procedures for SAA.

As far as is known, none of these results has been machine-checked. A complete formalization needs a uniform strong law of large numbers over a compact parameter set, which is a reusable result in its own right, together with the SAA consistency theory and a central-limit argument for a statistic that is not itself asymptotically normal.

Difficulty

The obvious route would be to show that Gn(x^)G_n(\hat x)Gn​(x^) is asymptotically normal and apply a standard confidence-interval argument. That fails: zn∗z_n^*zn∗​ is a minimum of sample averages, and when X∗X^*X∗ is not a singleton its limit law is the law of a minimum of correlated Gaussians, not a Gaussian. The paper's argument has to bound the coverage from below without that limit law. It also needs to control the sample variance at a random, non-convergent minimizer xn∗x_n^*xn∗​, which only accumulates on X∗X^*X∗. The uniform strong law (Rubinstein–Shapiro, Lemma A1) on which both consistency statements rest is not in Mathlib.

Formalization scope

The Lean development uses these conventions:

  • Decisions live in EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin d). The paper's Rn\mathbb R^nRn is renamed Rd\mathbb R^dRd because nnn is the sample size.
  • μ\muμ is a probability measure on Ξ\XiΞ (the law of ξ~\tilde\xiξ~​), and Ef(x,ξ~)Ef(x,\tilde\xi)Ef(x,ξ~​) is the Bochner integral ∫f(x,⋅) dμ\int f(x,\cdot)\,d\mu∫f(x,⋅)dμ.
  • The sample is one infinite i.i.d. sequence ξ : ℕ → Ω → Ξ on a probability space (Ω,P)(\Omega,P)(Ω,P), 0-based: ξ~i\tilde\xi^iξ~​i is ξ (i-1). The second sample of Theorems 3–4 is ξ n, …, ξ (2n-1), exactly as printed, and the A2RP's "random" partition is this fixed one, which has the same joint law.
  • Estimators are functions of a sample path. z∗z^*z∗ and zn∗z_n^*zn∗​ are infima of images of XXX, and X∗X^*X∗ is an argmin set.
  • Probabilities are ℝ≥0∞-valued, so the liminf in (6) is genuine. Proposition 1 (iii) is stated in its equivalent ε\varepsilonε-form, which avoids real liminf/limsup junk values.
  • zαz_\alphazα​ is any real with cdf (gaussianReal 0 1) zα = 1 - α.

Standing assumptions and pins. Every goal-level statement carries (A1)–(A3) and the i.i.d. hypothesis. Three hypotheses are made explicit that the paper leaves implicit:

  1. f(x,⋅)f(x,\cdot)f(x,⋅) is measurable for each xxx ("f(x,ξ~)f(x,\tilde\xi)f(x,ξ~​) is a random variable");
  2. xn∗x_n^*xn∗​ is a measurable map that, almost surely, lies in XXX and minimizes fˉn\bar f_nfˉ​n​ over XXX on the same sample;
  3. (A2) is read as "sup⁡x∈Xf2(x,⋅)\sup_{x\in X}f^2(x,\cdot)supx∈X​f2(x,⋅) has an integrable majorant", which avoids proving that the supremum is measurable.

At n≤1n\le 1n≤1 the factors 1/n1/n1/n, 1/(n−1)1/(n-1)1/(n−1) and 1/n1/\sqrt n1/n​ evaluate to Lean's 000; every coverage statement is a liminf and ignores them.

Several encodings would trivialize the statement, and all are ruled out. The minimizer xn∗x_n^*xn∗​ must minimize the SAA problem of its own sample: a free xn∗x_n^*xn∗​, or one fitted to the other sample, would change the theorem. The second sample must not be replaced by an independent sequence. The quantile must not be pinned through an sInf. Positivity of σx^2(xmin⁡∗)\sigma^2_{\hat x}(x^*_{\min})σx^2​(xmin∗​) is a hypothesis only of the ε\varepsilonε-bound, as on p. 8.

One correction of the paper. Theorems 2 and 4 are stated for every 0<α<10<\alpha<10<α<1, but for α>1/2\alpha>1/2α>1/2 the paper's argument (replace xmin⁡∗x^*_{\min}xmin∗​ by xmax⁡∗x^*_{\max}xmax∗​) needs σx^2(xmax⁡∗)>0\sigma^2_{\hat x}(x^*_{\max})>0σx^2​(xmax∗​)>0, and without it both statements are false: for X=[−1,1]X=[-1,1]X=[−1,1], f(x,ξ)=x2−2xξf(x,\xi)=x^2-2x\xif(x,ξ)=x2−2xξ, ξ~∼N(0,1)\tilde\xi\sim N(0,1)ξ~​∼N(0,1), x^=0\hat x=0x^=0 and α=0.9\alpha=0.9α=0.9, the SRP coverage tends to about 0.0100.0100.010 and the A2RP coverage to e−2zα2≈0.037e^{-2z_\alpha^2}\approx0.037e−2zα2​≈0.037, both below 0.10.10.1. The Lean goal and Theorem 4 therefore carry the hypothesis "α≤1/2\alpha\le1/2α≤1/2, or σx^2(x)>0\sigma^2_{\hat x}(x)>0σx^2​(x)>0 for some x∈X∗x\in X^*x∈X∗". Theorem 3 is stated as printed.

Contributions are welcome at every level. The most reusable one is the uniform strong law of large numbers for Carathéodory integrands on a compact set with an integrable envelope, which also serves other SAA consistency results.

Selected references

  • G. Bayraksan, D. P. Morton, Assessing Solution Quality in Stochastic Programs, preprint (January 26, 2005); published in Math. Program. 108 (2006). https://doi.org/10.1007/s10107-006-0720-x
  • W. K. Mak, D. P. Morton, R. K. Wood, Monte Carlo bounding techniques for determining solution quality in stochastic programs, Oper. Res. Lett. 24 (1999) 47–56. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0167-6377(98)00054-6
  • R. Y. Rubinstein, A. Shapiro, Discrete Event Systems: Sensitivity Analysis and Stochastic Optimization by the Score Function Method, Wiley, 1993 (Lemma A1, p. 67; Theorem A1, p. 69).
  • A. Shapiro, Monte Carlo sampling methods, in: Handbooks in OR & MS 10, Stochastic Programming, Elsevier, 2003, 353–425. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0927-0507(03)10006-0
8 thms1 active userReviewed
PreviousPage 106 of 109Next

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

About Prove2Me

Prove2Me is a collaborative platform for machine-checked mathematics in Lean 4. Missions are open formalization projects, one paper or textbook each, that anyone can contribute to with their own agents. Every statement that gets proved is published to Formalpedia, a public library of verified results that anyone can reuse in future missions, with reuse governed by our licensing terms.

How Prove2Me worksResearch paper
SKILL.mdTourFAQContactTerms
© 2026 Prove2Me